<?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1" ?>
<doc callnum="SH327.7.F6 A77 1983">
<metadata>
	<titleStmt>
		<mainTitle nfc="0"><title>Assessment of fisheries habitat, Charlotte Harbor and Lake Worth, Florida</title>:<titleExt>final report for contract period 18 November 1981 through 30 November 1983</titleExt>/<respStmt>Barbara A. Harris ... [et al.</respStmt>]</mainTitle>
	</titleStmt>
	<authorStmt>
		<persAuthor><name type="surname">Harris, Barbara A.</name></persAuthor>
		<corpAuthor><name type="jurisdiction">Florida.</name><subName>Marine Research Laboratories.</subName></corpAuthor>
		<corpAuthor><name>Coastal Zone Information Center (CZIC)</name></corpAuthor>
	</authorStmt>
	<imprint><pubPlace>St. Petersburg, FL</pubPlace>:<pubName>Florida Dept. of Natural Resources, Bureau of Marine Research, Marine Research Laboratories</pubName>,<pubDate>1983</pubDate></imprint>
	<classStmt>
		<locClass>
			<subject cat="top">Fisheries</subject>
			<subject cat="geo">Florida.</subject>
		</locClass>
		<locClass>
			<subject cat="top">Estuaries</subject>
			<subject cat="geo">Florida.</subject>
		</locClass>
		<locClass>
			<subject cat="top">Estuarine fisheries</subject>
			<subject cat="geo">Florida.</subject>
		</locClass>
		<locClass>
			<subject cat="top">Fishes</subject>
			<subject cat="gen">Habitat</subject>
			<subject cat="geo">Florida.</subject>
		</locClass>
	</classStmt>
</metadata>

<text xml:space="preserve">
<pb n="1" />

                                       I  U. S. DEPARTMENT    . '", ;'&lt;F N0A-
                                       COASTAL SERVICES :.'r ,
                                       2234 SOUTH HOBSOr. . f,
                                       CHARLESTON , SC  ".'"   - ''

                              ASSESSMENT OF FISHERIES HABITAT:

                          CHARLOTTE HARBOR AND LAKE WORTH, FLORIDA

                                           Final Report

                  for contract period 18 November 1981 throuqh 30 November 1983

                   Barbara A. Harris, Kenneth D. Haddad, Karen A. Steidinger,

                                         and James A. Huff

                              Florida Department of Natural Resources

                                     Bureau of Marine Research

                                   Marine Research Laboratories

                                        St. Petersburg, FL

                                           November 1983

                                              3?Property of CSC Library

I a            This project was supported by a grant from the Florida Office of Coastal

'   rp-r-   Management,  Department of Environmental Requlation, with funds provided by

    rem the United States Office of Ocean and Coastal  Resource Management, NOAA,

            under the Coastal Zone Management Act of 1972, as amended.
<pb n="2" />

                                 CONTENTS

        Contents
        Acknowledgements
 I.    Introduction and Rationale                                      1
II.    Estuaries
          A.  Description                                              9
          B.  Importance of Estuaries as Nursery Grounds              13
          C.  Estuarine Habitat Components                            15
              1. Mangroves                                            16
              2. Seagrass Beds                                        21
              3. Salt Marshes                                         25
              4. Mud Flats                                            29
              5. Oyster Reefs                                         30
              6. Unvegetated Subtidal Bottom Areas                    32
              7. Water Column                                         33
          D.  Estuarine Food Web                                      35
III.    Adjacent Land Use and Habitat Alteration
          A.  Estuarine Limitations                                   39
          B.  Perturbations                                           43
 IV.    Restoration                                                   51
          A.  Seagrass Restoration                                    52
          B.  Mangrove Restoration                                    57
          C.  Salt Marsh Restoration                                  61
          D.  Miscellaneous Restoration Techniques                    64
  V.    Linking Juvenile Fish to Estuaries
          A.  Species Found in Estuaries                              69
          B.  Diet Analyses                                           75
          C.  Stable Isotope Analyses                                 80
          D.  Correlations Between Fisheries Yield and
              Habitat Type                                            83
          E.  Correlations Between Declines in Fisheries
              Yield and Wetlands Destruction                          85
              1. Life History Studies
                    Red drum (Sciaenops ocellatus)                   86
                     Spotted seatrout (Cynoscion nebulosus)           88
                    Black mullet (Mugil cephalisT                    91
                     Blue crab (Callinectes sapidus)                  92
                     Pink shrimp (Penaeus duorarum)                   94
              2. Fisheries Statistics: l950-1981                      97
                    Charlotte Harbor                                101
                     Lake Worth                                      106
 VI.    Land Use and Vegetation Maps of Charlotte Harbor and
        Lake Worth: Historical and Recent                            111
          A.  Background                                             111
          B.  Problems and Recommendations                           112
          C.  Description of Map Products                            115
          D.  Acreage Values - Charlotte Harbor
              1.  General Site Description                           119
              2.  General Acreage Values                            123
<pb n="3" />

                            ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

    We  express  much  gratitude  to  many  people  who  provided  assistance

during this project, particularly to those who helped formulate ideas on a

project to assess fisheries habitat loss during discussions as far back as

1980.     We thank  NASA Earth Resources  Laboratory personnel  for initial

training  in  ELAS  and  for  answering the  many  questions  concerning the

development of the Marine Resources Geobased Information System.   We thank

Fred Calder and Dave Worley (DER) for providing valuable advice and support

in developing the successful grant application.   Jim Stoutamire  (DER) did

much to facilitate the completion of this report by providinq expeditious

contract guidance.   Thanks  also to Roy Williams and Mark Leiby for their

help with fisheries data;  to Ann Marshall of Lee County's Marine Extension

Office, Roger Clark and William Sheftal of DNR Bureau of Land Manaqemnent,

Steve Travis of DNR Bureau of Parks and Recreation, and Stewart Bradow of

DER for their help in field sampling; to Mike Sprague for the use of SEAS'

boats; to Robin Lewis of Mangrove Systems, Inc. for use of his data in our

presentations;   to Mark Moffler for his excellent drawings of seagrasses;

to David Crewz for his drafting and drawings of mangroves; to Warren Clary

of DOT for providing computer training;   to Mary Krost and library staff

for providing much assistance; to Winnie Sue Moravec and Jeff Brown for

folding maps and binding the report, to DNR's Division of Recreation and

Parks for the use of their white printer; to Alonzo Felder for drafting

numerous graphs; and, finally, to Margie Myers for typing this report.
<pb n="4" />

                                   I        . INTRODUCTION AND RATIONALE

                Estuaries are coastal embayments or lagoons where saltwater and

           freshwater  interact.   They  are  among the most  productive  ecosystems  on

              Earth because of this interaction and their relative shallowness compared

           to open seas. Estuaries provide food and shelter for a multitude of living

           resources  such as fishes and crustaceans.   Their fringing vegetation  and

5             wetlands can absorb flood waters, recharge ground water, assimilate wastes

           and excess nutrients and, therefore, they maintain water quality, recycle

5             nutrients,  and control  erosion.   Estuaries  also have a direct aesthetic,

           recreational, and commercial value, exemplified by the location of urban

S             centers  and  recreational  and  commercial  enterprises.    Protection  and

5            management  of  Florida  estuaries  to  retain  their  natural  functions  and

           benefits to man is tied to efficient growth management.

                Nearly 70% of Florida's recreational and commercial fisheries species

           are dependent on estuaries during at least part of their life span, usually

S             in the juvenile stages prior to reaching harvest  size.   In Nakamura et

5             al.'s (1980) listing of recreational finfish stages found in estuaries, hle

           stated "In each estuarine area, the number of species was lowest for eggs,

5            second  lowest  for  larvae,  third  lowest  for  adults,  and  highest  for

           juveniles .... Thus, additional credence is provided to the importance of

5    estuaries as nursery grounds for juvenile recreational fishes...." ShrirnD

           and many species of juvenile fishes move out of the estuary to offshore

              areas  to spawn or spend their  adult  life.   They reenter the estuary as

5             eggs, larvae or juveniles.   Some species, such as spotted seatrout, spend

           their entire life within the estuary while others move out as juveniles and
<pb n="5" />

come back to spawn near barrier islands or at the lower reaches of the

estuary.

    Estuarine  environments  provide  necessary food  and  protection  from3

predators for these growing fishes.   This dependency is one of inference

based on known repeated frequencies and abundance of juveniles in bays and
lagoons.   Various experiments and field observations have also illustrated

that shallow bay bottoms and intertidal vegetated areas provide cover and

food items to a variety of animals.   These estuarine and nearshore areas3

lend support and continuity to animal populations seeking refuge, but only

if  the  estuary,  as  a system  of  structural  components  and  interactiveU

processes,  maintains  a  healthy,  dynamic  state  of  diversity  and

productivity.

     Florida has extensive estuarine and marine coastal areas with emergent

vegetation such as marsh grasses and mangroves and submergent vegetation

such  as seagrasses.   About  430,000  acres of mangroves  and an estimated3

502,000- acres of submerged vegetation exist in Florida.   Sixty percent of

saltwater wetlands in the United States occur in Gulf Coast states and the

Gulf of Mexico supports two of the largest U.S. commercial fisheries:3

menhaden  and shrimp.   Amounts of emergent  and submergent  vegetation  and

freshwater flow have been associated statistically with shrimp and fish3

yield in some areas.

     The estuary is a multi-dimensional and multi-structured habitat forI

living resources such as fishes and crustaceans. Habitat represents where

an organism lives in time/space and includes bottom tyoe (e.g. vegetated),

water depth, water quality, salinity, and other parameters than can change1

daily,  seasonally or geographically.   Habitat has vertical  and horizontal

vari abilIi ty.    A  specific  species'  habitat  typically  changes  with  age

                                   21
<pb n="6" />

           whereby the animal moves from one area to another.   The species is adapted

           to such change; it is part of its life history.  If the habitat is removed

             or  altered  in  a substantial .way,  populations  of that  species  may  not

           survive because of stress, lack of food, or increased competition or

           predation.      Many  people  interpret  estuarine  habitat  by  structural

           component, e.g. mangrove stands, salt marshes, seagrass beds, oyster reefs,

           mud flats, sand bars, or even man-made structures such as jetties.  These

3             components  represent  shoreline and bottom type.   Although certain species

           or assemblages may be more prevalent in these areas, "habitat" per se is

              temporally and spatially multi-dimensional.   It varies from one species to

3             another and is defined by a multitude of parameters.   It is more than a

           person can perceive visually from any one vantage point.

 *                  A variety  of potential  variables  exist  to  determine  relationships

           between  species  and  habitat.    For example,  the  U.S.  Fish  and Wildlife

             Service  (USFWS) and others have identified  availability of food items at

           different ages, spawning season and area, age at spawning, transport of

           eggs and larvae, larval recruitment and its area and timing, salinity and

3             temperature   tolerances,   substrate   type,   presence   and   abundance   of

           predators, water quality, available cover, and other habitat and species

3             variables.   Resource partitioning among different species as juveniles or

           adults can involve different temporal and spatial distributions by age and

              feeding habits.  Differences in feeding apparatuses, digestive systems, and

3            feeding  habits  can  lessen direct competition  for available resources  and

           allow  species  to  co-exist.       To  develop  Habitat  Suitability  Indices

3             (models),  USFWS has used ranges and means of salinity,  turbidity,  depth,

         *                                                          3
<pb n="7" />

dissolved oxygen, and temperature, water color, bottom type, sediments, and

diversity or amount of cover.  The index is thought to have a relationship

to "habitat" carrying capacity, but values only suggest whether one area is

more or less suitable than another.

    Since the 1950's, Florida's population has soared.   With people came

development,   agriculture,   urbanization,   and  industrialization.        Such3

development has destroyed or altered coastal habitats and wetlands.  These

events have led to loss of productive vegetation and cover, loss of openI

bay areas, alteration of freshwater flow patterns, pollution of rivers and

estuaries, and other perturbations.

    The direct loss of estuarine shoreline and bottom habitat componentsI

such as saltmarshes, mangroves, and seagrasses has been dramatic,

particularly adjacent to urban areas.   Such direct loss has resulted from

dredging and filling, channelization, ditching, and mosquito impoundments.

For  example,  Lewis  (1979)  documented  a 44%  loss  of  mangroves  on  theI

southern shore of Hillsborough County and estimated an 81% loss of

seagrasses  in Tampa Bay.   Frayer et al.  (1982) estimated that over one-

third of the United States losses in coastal wetlands due to urbanizationI

occurred  in Florida.   According to other projections,  215,000 additional

acres will  be lost due to development during 1980-2000.   Direct  loss of

habitat components leads to loss of nursery habitat, increased suspended

loads,  increased  erosion,  and decreased  water quality.   One of the most

dramatic examples of impact involves mosquito impoundments where salt

tolerant vegetation dies, poor water quality causes physiological stress,

and diverse fish assemblages are reduced to only a few tolerant speciesI

lower  in  the  food  chain  (Harrington  and  Harrinqton,  1982).   When  one

                                   41
<pb n="8" />

impoundment was opened, it became revegetated and fish diversity increased

(Gilmore  et  al.  1982).   This example points  out that  although  habitat

components may be lost through  removal  or die offs, the habitat  itself

merely  changes;  it  has  gone  from  a healthy  environment  with  biotic

diversity and richness to one that supports fewer, less desirable species.

It  then  is  the  alteration  of  habitat  that  impedes  the  function  and

efficiency of the system through shifts in species composition and loss of

certain populations.

     Alteration of freshwater flow to coastal areas has severely impacted

estuarine systems.   Alterations have occurred in timing, amount, quality,

and  direction  of freshwater  discharge.   Such  alterations  through water

retention  areas,  canalization,  irrigation,  and  programmed  releases  can

increase or decrease estuarine  salinity regimes  and stress  populations,

affect available dissolved oxygen, and affect the delivery and type of

nutrients  and  food  particles.    Modification  of  estuarine  circulation

patterns through altered freshwater flow, channelization, dredge and fill,

bridges, and spoil banks can create poor flushing and exchange of water in

shallow areas and lead to a condition of excess nutrients and monospecific

algal blooms (eutrophication).

     Other sources that can alter the quality and quantity of estuarine

habitats  are  point  and  nonpoint  source  pollutants,  e.g.  sewage,  land

runoff,  industrial  wastes,  pesticide  spraying,  mining,  toxic  chemical

spills, etc.   Often  these  impacts  are accumulative.   Pollutants  in the

water column may be barely detectable, yet they can be magnified in the

sediments through settling, adsorbtion, flocculation,  and high residency.

They can, therefore, impact the system because the bottom and water are

coupled  through  biological,  physical  and  chemical  interactions.   Even

                                    5
<pb n="9" />

though estuaries are dynamic systems adjusted to wide fluctuations, major3

acute or chronic stresses or impacts will alter the systems and the life it

supports.I

    Amounts of emergent and submergent vegetation and freshwater flow have

been associated statistically with fisheries yield in some areas, yet mostU

perceived fisheries declines are based on user group observations and/or

reduced commercial landings, not on documented catch-per-unit effort

decreases.   Sports fishermen and commercial fishermen have both complained

of reduced resource availability and have attributed it to a variety of

causes,  but mainly  to overfishinq  and/or habitat  alteration.   However,3

without adequate fisheries statistics to determine total fishing mortality

and  population  dynamics,  catch-per-unit  effort  and  total  populationI

abundance  cannot  be  determined  for  such  multispecies  fisheries  (&gt;1001

species of interest in Florida marine waters).   Correlation of fisheries

decline with habitat component loss is also difficult because of problems

with available fisheries statistics and lack of current quantification for

carrying capacity of different habitat components or ecosystems.   CarryingI

capacity  itself  is  difficult  to  define  and  characterize,  much  less

quantify, because it involves both benthic and pelagic environments, their

structure,  quantity  and  quality.   It represents  how much  biomass  of a3

specific species or multiple species can be supported in a specified time-

space relationship.   Carrying capacity can differ between salt-narshes, and

vegetated bay bottoms; it could vary between two seagrass beds in, two

different parts of the same estuary.

    Florida is currently the second fastest growing state in the nation3

with 17.4 million residents projected for the year 2000.  Over 60% of the

1000 new residents per day will locate along the coast; today, over 73% of3

                                  6
<pb n="10" />

          Florida's  residents  already  live  in  coastal  counties.    Decisions  and

          implementation  of  actions  in  the  next  few  years  will  determine  how

            Florida's estuaries survive and in turn whether they will  support living

          resources as we know them now, and whether they will retain any aesthetic

          and recreational appeal and value.

               This is a critical period in Florida's history, one requiring

          farsighted management  and legislation.   First we must understand what an

             estuary is, how it functions, and why it is necessary to maintain it as a

          system. Only if we recognize and accept the values of individual estuaries

          can we manage them properly.

               The  Department  of  Natural  Resources,  as  well  as  many  others,

          recognizes that habitat alteration is a significant factor affecting

          fisheries yield. Therefore, the Department has made a long term commitment

          through  various  research  projects  and  legislative  requests  to  pursue

              documentation of such alterations, their effects on resource availability

           and yield, the development of a more comprehensive fisheries statistics

           program, restoration and enhancement techniques, and a program to purchase

           sensitive lands.   Concurrently with development of mitigation, restoration

           and creation of estuarine habitat and the establishment of preserves and

              sanctuaries,  we need to:   1) conduct  long term multidisciplinary system

           studies, 2) conduct trend analyses by inventorying estuarine resources and

          changes therein over time, and 3) inform and educate the public on the
           function  and  importance  of estuaries.   This Coastal  Management  oroject

           entitled "Assessment of Fishery Habitat Loss, Use of a Coastal Geographic

           Digital Data Base and Establishment of a Geobased Information System'

           addressed  trend  analyses  over  time  to  correlate  changes  in  habitat

              components,  such  as mangroves  and seagrasses, with changes  in fisheries

         *                                                           7
<pb n="11" />

yield using aerial photography and commercial landings by individual
system,  i.e.  the Charlotte Harbor System and the Lake Worth System.   The
continuance  of  the  program  in  1983-85  addresses  trend  analyses  for                   U
additional systems and public education.

                                    8
<pb n="12" />

  I  Estuaries

         Idacent Land Use and Habitat
           Alteration

        Restoration
<pb n="13" />

                                                       II.  ESTUARIES

            II  1 A.  DESCRIPTION

 U                  Estuaries  and  lagoons  constitute  80-90%  of  the  Atlantic  and  Gulf

3             coasts of the continental  United States  (Lauff  1967).   Pritchard  (1967)

           provided the most widely accepted defiinition of an estuary: "a semi-

3             enclosed coastal  body of water which has a free connection with the open

           sea and within which sea water is measurably diluted with fresh water

              derived from land dra inage."  This fresh water is introduced as river flow,

3             stream flow, or overland sheet flow, with resulting estuarine waters known

           as "brackish."   Lankford  (1977) described  a coastal  lagoon as "a coastal

3            zone  depression  below MHHW  (mean  high  high  waves)  having  permanent  or

           ephemeral communications with the sea, but protected from the sea by some

             type  of  barrier."

                Estuaries  are characteri zed by constant and variable changes.   Tides

           daily influence water depth, salinity regimes, and the presence or absence

           of water in very shallow zones.   Heavy rainfall introduces for short time

           periods large amounts of fresh water.  Dry spells cause estuarine waters to

3             become  more  saline.    Wind  mixes  the  water.    Estuaries  are  capable  of

           withstanding these wide ranges in environmental parameters - conditions

              that normally would collapse other ecosystems.  These variabilities are the

3             driving  forces  of estuaries.  'Without  them,  the system would  not be an

           estuary.

 5                 Day  and  Yanez-Arancibia  (1982)  describe  the  physical  traits  of

           estuaries:

                                                                   9
<pb n="14" />

    I1.  They are semi-enclosed  yet connected  to the sea.   This partial

        envelopment provides a buffer from oceanic effects.

    2.  They receive input from a freshwater source.  The amount of fresh-

        water varies from very low during periods of extreme drought to

        high  after storms or seasons of heavy rainfall.   Dissolved  andI

        suspended materials and nutrients also enter the system via fresh-

        water inflow.

    3.  Tides  influence  the  circulation  pattern  of  estuaries  and  are

        important in physical, chemical, and biological interactions

        Tidal action allows the mixing of fresh and salt water and plays a3

        major role in exporting and importing material from and into the

        estuary.

    4.  Estuaries  are  shallow.    Surface  turbulence,  such  as wind  and3

        waves,  affects  the  bottom  as  well  as  the  surface.

    5.  Estuaries  have complex water circulation patterns, influenced by3

        winds, tides, river currents, and the qeormorphology of the basin.

    6.  Relatively rapid geomnorphological  changes occur in estuaries be-I

        cause  powerful  physical  energies  resuspend  and move  sediments.

        This characteristic is exemplified in Florida by the change in

        shape and location of some barrier islands  and the natural  con-3

        struction of new islands or channels during severe storms.

    Whittaker  (1975)  found  that  estuaries,  in  comparison  to  several

other ecosystem types, are one of the most highly productive systems on
Earth (Table 1).  Estuaries are characterized by high rates of primary and

secondary production because of their rich nutrient supplies, efficient

                                   10
<pb n="15" />

Table 1. NET PRIMARY PRODUCTION OF MAJOR ECOSYSTEMS
                     (After Whittaker 19/b5)

        Ecosystem                            Net Primary Production
                                              (g/m2/yr dry weight)

                                            Normal range        Mean

   Lake and stream                            100-1500           500

   Swamp and marsh                           800-4000           2000

   Tropical forest                          1000-5000           2000

   Boreal forest                             400-2000            800

   Woodland and shrubland                    200-1200            600

   Savanna                                   200-2000            700

   Temperate grassland                        150-1500           500

   Tundra and alpine                           10-400            140

   Desert scrub                                10-250             70

   Extreme desert, rock and ice                 0-10               3

   Agricultural land                          100-4000           650

   Open ocean                                   2-400            125

   Continental shelf                         200-600             350

   Attached algae and estuaries              500-4000           2000
<pb n="16" />

conservation, and the occurrence of several different types of primary

producers (Day and Yanez-Arancibia 1982).  Estuaries are also ecologically

complex,  not  because of a high species  diversity  (species  diversity is

actually quite low in estuaries), but because of the variety of environ-

mental  factors,  habitat  types,  and  highly  complex  food  webs.

     Although  estuaries  are  dynamic,  transient,  and  variable,  they  are

remarkably  stable  as  an  ecosystem.       Margalef  (1968)  explains  that

ecological stability evolves in two different ways:   (1) a system evolves

under constant conditions and develops a steady state and thus stability,

or (2) a system evolves under variable conditions and develops mechanisms

to  adapt  to the variability.    Estuaries  undoubtedly  developed  via the

second method.  Estuarine biota have developed physiological and behavorial

patterns to adapt to their fluctuating environment (Day and Yanez-Arancibia

1982).   Organisms  that  successfully  dwell  within  the dynamic  estuarine

system  must  be  tolerant  of  change  (Beal  1980).

     Probably the single most renowned function of estuaries is their role

as nursery grounds for growing fish,  shrimp,  and shellfish.   Because of

their  high  productivity,  large  food  supply,  diversity  of  cover,  and

shallow, calm waters, estuaries serve as prime nurseries for many species.

This  aspect will be discussed in detail in the next section.

     High productivity of coastal offshore waters may result from the

existence of estuaries.   Odum (1980) explained that most fertile coastal

zones receive nutrients either from deep water upwelling or from shallow

water  outwelling with  areas  such  as reefs,  banks, seagrass  beds, algal

mats, and salt marshes being the prime contributors.  In Florida, mangroves

                                    12
<pb n="17" />

would also contribute nutrients.   Odum (1980) stated that outwelling is

likely a periodic or seasonal occurrence, associated with high spring tides

and storms.   Turner et  al. (1979) found that offshore productivity and

densities of zooplankton, fish eggs, and fish larvae were strongly coupled

with the extent and productivities of local estuaries. They concluded that

the  influence  of estuaries  on continental  shelf ecology was  extensive.

II B.  IMPORTANCE OF ESTUARIES AS NURSERY GROUNDS

     According to life history studies, very few marine species of

recreational  and commercial  value utilize the shallow coastal  waters of

estuaries as spawning areas.   However, estuaries  are used extensively as

nursery grounds.  Most finfishes and crustaceans migrate offshore to spawn.

The eggs  are usually planktonic,  developing  into  larvae that  depend  on

currents and tides to transport them toward shore.  As post larvae, they

enter the estuary, and spend their juvenile existance in close association

with the estuarine system (Odum and Smith 1981).  Some species grow within

the estuary for several years while others remain there for life.  Numerous

authors such as Nakamura et al. (1980) and Odum and Smith (1981) have noted

the  importance  of  estuaries  as  nursery  grounds.

     Joseph (1973) described nursery grounds as areas that (1) are physio-

logically suitable in terms of chemical and physical features,  (2) provide

an abundant food supply,  and (3) provide some degree of protection from

predators.   Chemical and physical parameters include water depth, tempera-

ture, salinity,  turbidity,  and tidal  and wave action.   Climatic features

such as rainfall, cold spells, and wind coupled with tidal action may be

                                   13
<pb n="18" />

the  most  influencing  factors  on  depth,  temperature,  and  salinity,

irrespective of human influence.   Because juveniles are more tolerant of

wide ranges in environmental variabilities than their adult counterparts,I

changes in depth, temperature, and salinity serve as protective mechanisms

for the juveniles by forcing out adults during periods of (for them)I

intolerable  conditions.   Seagrasses  as well  as mangrove  roots  and salt

marsh stalks mitigate predation by providing hiding places, as well as

baffles for waves  and currents  (Orth  1977).   Beal  (1980) summarized the

nursery aspect by stating that because the estuary is dynamic, species that

dwell  there  must  be  tolerant  of  change.    This  is certainly true for

juvenile fish and shrimp.

    Margalef (1963) suggested that unpredictable environments character-I

ized by high abiotic stress maintain both a high resource standing crop and

low utilization by endemic species.   Miller and Dunn (1980) applied this

concept to estuaries:   an outside population whose early life stages are3

spent in estuaries to exploit the food source will profit by this

strategy.I

    Miller and Dunn (1980) summarized the general features of feeding

relationships of estuarine juvenile fish assemblages:

     1.  Flexibility of feeding habits in time/space3

    2. Omnivory

     3.  Sharing a common pool of resources among species5

     4. Exploitation of food chains at different levels

        by the same speciesI

     5.  Ontogenetic changes in diet with rapid growth5

     6. Short food chains based on detritus/algal feeders.

                                 14
<pb n="19" />

    The most important feeding characteristic  is likely the first:   the

ability to switch prey items in accordance with food availability, commonly

termed the generalist  strategy.   Miller  and Dunn  (1980) point out that

prey items  undergo  rapid  and  unpredictable  changes  in distribution  and

abundance  in response to abiotid stresses.   For example,  after a heavy

rain, the sudden presence of freshwater due to increased river flow,

terrestrial run-off, and the rain itself would probably produce a period of

hyposaline turbid conditions.    This situation might present the juvenile

population  with  a new  supply  of  food  items.    The  generalist  feeding

strategy then gives  juvenile  species  a selective  advantage over species

that  have  restricted  diets.

II C. ESTUARINE HABITAT COMPONENTS

     Florida estuaries are composed of six structural components or habitat

types:  mangroves,   seagrass  beds,  salt  marshes,  intertidal  mudflats,

unvegetated subtidal bottoms,  and oyster bars.   Overlying all six is the

water column.   In the intertidal  zone,  salt marshes  and mangroves occur

high with mudflats and oyster bars found low.   Seagrass beds grow in the

shallow subtidal zone.  Unvegetated subtidal bottom occurs at depths below

the seagrass zone and within seagrass beds. The water column overlies all

the habitats during high tides and covers only the subtidal areas during

low tides.   Sections  II C1 through  II C7 describe these seven areas in

greater detail.

                                   15
<pb n="20" />

II C 1. MANGROVES

    Mangroves  in  Florida  extend  from  the  Keys  to  approximately  30°N

latitude on both coasts.  Three species of mangroves are found in Florida

(Figure 1):

    Red mangroves (Rhizophora mangle) are easily identified by their prop

       roots. Reds generally grow nearest to the shoreline.

    Black  mangroves  (Avicennia  germinans)  have  characteristic  small

       verticle root offshoots, called pneumatophores, attached to the

       underground roots and arising from the substrate.  Blacks commonly

       grow higher in the intertidal zone than reds.

    White mangroves (Laguncularia racemosa) have a diffuse below-ground

       root system with verticle, bulbous knee-like projections arising

       from the roots.   Whites generally occur much higher than reds or

       blacks,  out of the  intertidal  zone,  in areas  affected  only by

       extreme tides.

    Odum et  al.  (1982) describe  four factors  that  determine mangrove

distribution and extent of development:

     1.  Climate - since mangroves  are a tropical  species,  they do not

        tolerate temperatures below freezing for any length of time.

    2.  Saltwater - most mangroves are able to grow without difficulty in

        pure  freshwater  habitats.   However,  they  are faculative  halo-

        phytes; salinity acts as a competitive excluder to other vascular

        plants.

     3.  Tidal fluctuation - tides serve as subsidies to mangrove systems

         (a) The constant alternation of standing water and then no water

                                   16
<pb n="21" />

                     BLACK
                   MANGROVE

 WHITE
MANGROVE
                                             RED
                                          MANGROVE

                                                         -    -I  HIGH TIDE

                                                                       LOW TIDE

                Figure 1. A stylized view of Florida mangroves.

                                17
<pb n="22" />

        and fluctuations in salinity reduces competition from other

        vascular plants.   (b) In some areas, tides carry salt water high

        into the estuary against the outgoing flow of freshwater, allowingI

        the establishment of mangroves well inland.  Tides also transport

        nutrients  into  mangroves,  and  export  organic  carbon,  reducedI

        sulphur compounds, propagules (seeds), and detritus.

    4. Substrate and wave energy - the most productive mangrove systems

        develop on substrates of anaerobic fine-grained muds composed of

        silt, clay, and a large percentage of organic matter, with very

        little wave energy.I

    Lugo and Snedeker (1974) described six major mangrove forest communi-

ties  (Figure 2):   the overwash mangrove forest,  fringe mangrove forest,

riverine mangrove forest, basin mangrove forest, hammock forest, and scrubI

or dwarf forest.   Each type embodies  its  own characteristic  variables,

ranges, and differences such as soil type, soil depth, flushing rates,

primary production, rate of litter decomposition, and nutrient recycling

rates.I

    Mangroves are considered one of the Earth's most productive systems

(Odum et a]. 1982; see Table 2).  Productivity of the three snecies vary

(Odum et a]. 1982);  red mangrove has the highest net productivity, black

has intermediate values, and white retains the lowest, assuming the plant

inhabit the zones for which they are best adapted and that these areas ar

devoid of strong limiting factors.  Odum et a] (1982) additionally noted

that reds experience a decreasing gross productivity with increasing

salinity while the productivity for blacks and whites increases to a

certain extent with increasing salinity.

                                  18
<pb n="23" />

(I) OVERWASH FOREST                (2) FRINGE FOREST

(3) RIVERINE FOREST                (4) BASIN  FOREST

(5) HAMMOCK FOREST                 (6) SCRUB FOREST

Figure 2. The six mangrove communities (redrawn from
           Odum et al. 1982, after Lugo and Snedaker
           1974).

                          19
<pb n="24" />

              Table 2. NET PRIMARY PRODUCTION OF HABITAT COMPONENTS

                            Average NP      Range NoI
  Habitat                     (gC/m /day)   (gC/m2/day)              Source

Mangroves (all species)            5.3         1.0 - 12.6    Odum et al. 1982

Seagrasses (Syringodium,       1.0 - 4.0       0.5 - 16.0    Zieman 1982
            Halodule, and
            Thalassia)

Salt marsh                         4.2         0.8 -  8.2    Durako et al. 1983

Mud flat                           0.5            -           Pomeroy 1959

Water column (phytoplankton)       0.9            ---         Thayer and Ustach 1981

     The estuarine system can benefit by the presence of mangroves.   The

aerial root system, especially the red mangrove prop roots, provides a

substrate for algae attachment and serves as a protected habitat for

nursery-stage  fish,  crustaceans,  and  shellfish.    These  intricate  root

systems  also play an important  part  in substrate  stabilization;   their

presence retards erosion.   Litter fall also can be important, forming the

basis of a mangrove-detritus food web, providing a supply of food to many

organisms.

     Mangroves  cleanse  inflowing  water  and  aid  in  nutrient  cycling.

Nitrogen, phosphorus, heavy metals, and more are removed from the water by

the combined activities of prop roots, prop root algae, associated sedi-

ments, and the multitude of invertebrates and microorganisms present in the

system  (Odum  et  al.  1982).   Nutrient  import,  originating  mostly  from

upland and terrestrial sources, is either reduced by faunal species and

exported,  or it becomes mangrove or algal  biomass.   Low nutrient import

                                    20
<pb n="25" />

results in low storage, low biomass, low productivity and small export,

whereas the outcome of high nutrient import is high storage, high biomass,

high  productivity,  and  moderate  export  (Odum  et  al.  1982).

 II C 2.  SEAGRASS BEDS

     Seven species of seagrasses inhabit Florida waters (Figure 3). Turtle

grass (Thalassia testudinum)  is the most abundant of the seagrasses with

ribbon-like leaves from 2 to 35 cm in length and 2 to 12 mm in width.  The

tips of the leaves are rounded.   Thalassia is capable of forming extensive

beds.   Shoal grass (Halodule wrightii) is generally accepted as the most

tolerant of all the seagrasses to temperature and salinity changes (cf.

Zieman,  1982).   Leaves are flat and are from 10 to 20 cm long and 3 mm

wide.   Leaf tips have 2 to 3 points.   Shoal  qrass,  too,  is capable of

forming extensive beds.   Manatee grass (Syringodium filiforme) is usually

found  amongst  other  species,  or  in  small  dense  patches.    Leaves  are

cylindrical  from 1.0 to 1.5 mm in diameter;  length  is variable.   Three

species of Halophila are sparsely distributed  (Zieman 1982).   Leaves are

ovate from 10 to 30 mm long.   Halophila engelmannii has 4 to 8 leaves on

the end of a stem 2 to 4 cm long.  Halophila decipens and H. johnsonii have

paired  leaves  arising  from  a single  rhizome  node.    Halophila  decipens

differs from H. johnsonii  in that the latter lacks root hairs,  and veins

emerge from the midrib at 45° angles rather than 60° angles of the former.

Widgeon  grass  (Ruppia  maritima)  occurs  in  both  fresh  and  salt  water

environments.   In saline  systems,  Ruppia is found primarily in areas of

reduced  salinity  (Zieman  1982),  but  it  also  inhabits  and  reproduces

                                    21
<pb n="26" />

                                            4
                                            2

                                      I. Thalassia testudinum
                                      2. Syringodium filiforme
                                      3. Halodule wrightii

6               i                                         4.  Halophila engelmannii
                                      5. Halophila johnsonii
                        7    6.  Ruppia maritima
      a    i     A    7.  Halophila deci pi ens

        Figure 3. Seagrasses of Florida.

                      22
<pb n="27" />

sexually  in  sites  with  salinities  as  high  as  380/oo  (M.  Moffler,

personal  communication).

    Seagrasses perform many significant functions in estuarine systems.

(1) Since leaf growth is generally &gt;5mm per day, and the typical lifetime

of a single Thalassia leaf is 30-60 days, seagrasses provide a tremendous

food source to herbivores, such as sea turtles and manatees, and detriti-

vores  (Zieman  1982).   In addition,  exportation  of  living  and  detrital

material provides energy to areas quite remote from the source grass beds

(Zieman  1981).   (2) In addition to their abundant food supply,  seagrass

beds provide shelter, i.e. places to hide for young stages of numerous

fish, crustaceans and shellfish.   The presence of seaqrasses is essential

to the occurrence and growth of many species of marine life (Zieman 1982).

Seagrasses also provide a surface for attachment for sessile epiphytes.

(3) Seagrass systems stabilize sediments; the leaves provide a baffle for

waves  and  currents  and  roots  and  rhizomes  bind  the  sediments,  thereby

retarding  erosion  (Zieman  1982).   (4) Seagrasses  aid in the cycling of

nitrogen by transporting it from the sediments into their leaf structure,

then  into  the  environment  via  herbivory  or  as  detritus  (Zieman  1982).

     In viewing seagrass systems with a holistic approach, they may be

classified as ecosystems of high diversity.   Seagrass meadows provide  a

habitat for numerous organisms.   Kikuchi  and Peres  (1977) described  the

biota that inhabit seagrass beds:

     1. Species living on or near the leaves, including epiphytes, micro

        and meiofauna, sessile fauna, mobile creeping and walking fauna,

        and swimming epifauna.

     2. Species attached to stems and rhizomes.

                                   23
<pb n="28" />

     3. Mobile species living under the leaf canopy (permanent residents,

        seasonal  residents,  visitors,  and  occasional  migrants).

    4. Infaunal species (found in unvegetated parts as well).

Added to this list are nektonic species living within and above the blades.

Brooke (1978) found 38 to 80 species were represented within five Thalassia

meadows (blade density &gt;3,000 blades/m2) in south Florida; abundance varied

from 292 to 10,644 individuals/m2.

     Seagrass blades create a surface on which epiphytes can attach. After

a leaf emerges, it remains "clean" for a period of time (Zieman 1982). As

they grow, they become heavily colonized, more so at the tips than at the

bases.     Harlin  (1980)  compiled  a  species  list  of  the  microalgae,

macroalgae,  and  animals  that  have  utilized  seagrasses  for  attachment.

Because the majority of seagrass consumers (turtles and manatees excluded)

do not possess a gut flora to digest structural cellulose, their nutrition

is derived from seagrass cell contents and attached epiphytes.  Epiphytized

blades thus provide a more valuable food source to most consumers than

clean  blades.

     Seagrasses probably are more important to the food web as detritus

than  as a source  for direct  herbivory.   Physical  breakdown  of detritus

occurs  through  the activities  of crabs,  shrimp,  and  amphipods.   During

decomposition, particles become smaller and provide a larger surface area

for colonizers such as bacteria, fungi, and other microorganisms.  Detritus

is an important food source for deposit feeders, providing polychaetes,

amphipods, isopods, ophiuroids, some gastropods, and mullet with much of

their nutrition  (Zieman  1982).    Detritivores  assimilate plant compounds

with  &lt;5%  efficiency  as  opposed  to  50-100%  efficiency  at  assimilatinq

associated microflora (Zieman 1982).

                                    24
<pb n="29" />

II C 3. SALT MARSHES

    Salt  marshes  are  herbaceous  plant  communities  in  northern  Florida

intertidal zones that are periodically tidally flooded by salt or brackish

water.   They predominate  over mangroves  (39% more acreage) as the most

abundant plant community of Florida's intertidal zone (Coastal Coordinating

Council 1973).  They are replaced by mangroves as the dominate vegetation

south of Cape Kennedy and Tarpon Springs (Odum et al.  1982);  marshes in

this southern region generally serve as a transitional zone between the

mangroves  and  fresh  water  marshes  (McNulty  et  al.  1972).

     Smooth  cordgrass  (Spartina  alterniflora)  dominates  Florida's  east

coast marsh vegetation  (Durako et al. 1983).  Along the southeast tip of

Florida, black needle rush, (Juncus roemarianus) exists in large marsh

areas in association with mangroves (Eleuterius 1976).  Juncus also occurs

in  large  stands  from Tarpon  Springs  to Apalachicola  Bay.   The Florida

panhandle has very little salt marsh.

     Juncus produces plant biomass continuously whereas Spartina grows in

the spring with a general  dieback in the winter (Turner 1976).   No two

marshes are alike and variations in productivity (Table 2) reflect complex

interactions between light energy, temperature, tidal subsidy, nutrient

availability and other factors.  Kruczynski et al. (1978) reported that net

aerial primary production of Juncus was highest in the low marsh decreasing

landward to about 30% of the low marsh value in the high marsh.  They also

found the same to be true for Spartina; production decreased landward to

less than 20% in the high marsh of the original value in the low marsh.

     Detrital material is the end result of 90% of the net production of

                                   25
<pb n="30" />

salt marshes  (de la Cruz 1973).  The export of detritus has historically

been believed to be the most important contribution of salt marshes to the

estuarine system.   Studies have provided evidence that energy was being

exported because production values were consistently higher than the sum of

the losses due to respiration, grazing, and the accumulation of organic

sediments  within the marsh  (Durako et al.  1983).  Studies that measure

amounts of carbon or organic matter entering and departing salt marshes

showed both a net export to the estuary and a net import.   Other studies

however, demonstrated that salt marshes may retain and utilize their own

production (Durako et al. 1983).

    Animal production is high in salt marsh systems.   Subrahmanyam et al.

(1976) found densities of marsh invertebrates to be 540 individuals/m2 for

a Juncus low marsh and 381 individuals/m2 for the high marsh.  Proximity of

the marsh to tidal waters or frequency of tidal inundation may be the

determining factor of organism density in salt marshes (Day et al. 1973).

Day et al. (1973) also reported that animal diversity within the marsh is

lower than values of adjacent open water areas, however, he found that

animal biomass was higher.  Zimmerman (in prep.) found shrimp densities of

11 shrimp/m2 within a Spartina marsh as opposed to 1.5 shrimp/m2 in non-

vegetated sites.

    Like seagrass and mangrove systems, salt marshes provide a concentra-

tion of high quality food for estuarine animals in addition to a conducive

environment  for early life stages.   Park and Batie (1979) describe four

additional  functions  for  salt  marshes:    1) tertiary  sewage  treatment,

2) fundamental  part of nutrient cycles, 3) long-term accumulators of non-

point source pollution, and 4) short term pollutant buffers.

                                   26
<pb n="31" />

               Releasing primary treated sewage into marshes introduces large amounts

          of organic matter into a system already high in organic detritus and can

              reduce  the  oxygen  content. of  the  water  to  unfavorable  levels.

          Eutrophication can easily result.  On the other hand, marshes are capable

          of  assimilating  secondary-treated  sewage  into  their  biological  systems

          without added stress. Secondary treatment of sewage wastes is a relatively

           inexpensive  process  when  done  by  sewage  treatment  plants.    Tertiary

              treatment,  however,  is  quite  costly.    By introducing  secondary-treated

           sewage into marshes, marshes can then become a site of free tertiary treat-

          ment (Gosselink et a]. 1974).

 *                  Salt marshes share in the nitrogen and phosphorus cycle; salt marsh

           systems break down particulate organic nitrogen and phosphorus, exporting

           them in dissolved  forms  (Park and Batie 1979).  This reaction increases

           estuarine productivity since estuarine biota are better able to assimilate

              dissolved -organics.

                As runoff, with its various types of associated non-point source

           pollution,  moves  through  salt  marshes,  its  velocity  is reduced.   This

*             causes suspended particles to settle out and become part of the sediment.

           If these particles remain permanently deposited, the following may result

              (Park and Batie 1979):

                1. reduction in turbidity.

                    2.  reduction of sediment in main part of the estuary.

                3. reduction of eutrophication due to adsorption of nutrients to

                    sedi ments.

 *                  4.  reduction of toxic materials due to adsorption of pesticides and

                    heavy metals to sediments.   In addition,  the toxins may become

                                               27
<pb n="32" />

buried or decomposed.                                                                          I
    Salt marshes are capable of acting as short-term pollution buffers by
stretching out the time frame of pollutant loading during periods of heavy                     I
rainfall.      Without  wetlands,  run-off  would  enter  the estuary directly,                I
however, by first flowing through the marsh, the length of time for
estuaries to receive run-off  increases  (Figure 4).  This may not decrease
the total amount of pollution entering the estuary, but it would decrease
the  amount per unit of time.                                                                  I

     &lt;t&lt;                           without wetlands|

     0
        _j                                                                                  I

                                   -withou  wetlands

                                              TIME

        Figure 4.  Rate of pollution loading to the receiving
                  water body   (after Park and Batie 1979).
     _J

                      z
     o2 '
    0

       To                               T,                                2
                              TIME

        Figure 4. Rate of pollution loading to the receiving
                     waterbody  (after Park and Batie 1979).I

                                 28I
<pb n="33" />

I  I  C 4.  MUD FLATS

     Petersen (1981) defines mud flats as "any unvegetated shoreline of a

sound,  lagoon,  estuary,  or  river  mouth  that  becomes  exposed  by  lower

tides."   Because of their barren appearance, at least in contrast to sea-

grasses and salt marshes, they are perceived to be insignificant in their

contribution  to  the  gross  primary  production  of  the  estuary.    They

function,  however,  to  produce  not  macrophytes,  but  rather  microscopic

benthic  algae.

     Diatoms,  dinoflagellates,  filamentous  green  algae,  and  blue-green

algae compose the primary producers of mud flats,  and are observed as a

discoloration of the sediment.   Turnover is rapid, but productivity rates

are less than half that of salt marsh and seagrass systems (Table 2),

however,  the  crop  is  in  a form  readily  useable  by  consumers.    Many

herbivores and deposit feeding invertebrates consume the benthic algae of

mud  flats.

     Benthic infauna are the primary inhabitants of mud flats during low

tide when the flats  are exposed.   Numerous species of birds extensively

utilize this habitat as feeding grounds during daylight hours.   However,

during high tides and especially at night, crabs, shrimp,  and fish become

the major consumers.   Summerson (1980; cited by Petersen 1981) found that

crabs and bottom-feeding fishes are more evenly distributed over vegetated

and  unvegetated  bottoms  during  the  night.    During  daylight,  however,

seagrass  beds  contain  far  higher  numbers  of fishes,  crabs,  and shrimp

(Petersen  1981).

     In addition to their value as a food producer, mud flats also serve as

                                   29
<pb n="34" />

a site for detrital breakdown.   Currents and tides carry plant debris from

the  source  habitat  to the mud flat.   During  low tide,  much debris  is

available  to  fiddler  crabs,,  amphipods,  and  other  detritivores  that

physically break it down.  Through these processes, a substantial amount of

production  of  other  habitats  is made  available  to  mud  flat  consumers

(Petersen  1981).

II C 5.  OYSTER REEFS1

     Oyster reefs are defined as "the natural structures found between the

tide  lines  that  are  composed  of oyster  shell,  live oysters,  and other

organisms  that  are  discreet,  contiguous,  and  clearly  distinguishable

(during ebb tide) from scattered oysters in marshes and mud flats, and from

wave-formed shell windrows." (Bahr and Lanier 1981).

     Oyster  reefs  in  Florida  are  composed  of  the  American  oyster

(Crassostrea virginica) that range from 20°N to 54°N latitude.  The oyster

is a typical  estuarine  inhabitant,  tolerating broad  limits of salinity,

temperature,   turbidity,   and  oxygen   content.       Because  oysters  are

gregarious, they tend to form mounds ranging in size from scattered clumps

to huge solid masses.  The middle section of the intertidal zone affords

the best habitat for oyster reef development; the lower zone subjects

oysters to increased predation.

     A typical  reef is composed of three horizons.   The upper layer (5-

10cm) dries out during low tide, hosts a film of algae, and is colored a

ISummarized from Bahr and Lanier (1981).

                                    30
<pb n="35" />

pale greenish grey.  The mid layer remains moist and lacks an algal film.

A thin layer of detritus covers each shell and is colored reddish-brown.

The  lower  layer  is  composed' of non-living  shells  that  are  buried  in

anerobic sediments.   Of the upper and mid layers together,  approximately

61% by volume consists of living oysters, 21% consists of dead shells, and

18% consists of silt, clay, and non-oyster macro-fauna.

     In theory, oyster reefs benefit estuaries by influencing physical and

hydrological regimes.   Oyster reefs dampen current velocities, undoubtedly

for small areas, perhaps influencing the entire estuary. A slower current

allows for settlement of particulate matter, thereby, decreasing turbidity.

Within natural systems, where hard substrate is rather limited, oysters

provide a much needed habitat for algae and animals that require hard

surfaces  for  attachment.    In fact,  every  square  meter  of oyster  reef

provides  at  least  50  square  meters  of  available  hard  surface.    The

irregular surface, filled with nooks and crannies, serves as shelter for

motile invertebrates and, during high tides, for small fish.

     Oyster  reef  communities  are  composed  primarily  of  suspension  and

deposit-feeding macrofaunal species.  The community consists of various mud

crabs,  polychaetes, barnacles,  other macrofauna,  protozoa,  metazoa, and

bacteria.   Oysters themselves serve as food for various boring sponges and

the American oystercatcher, one of their major predators.   Overall,  this

macro-faunal community more importantly serves to assimilate carbon derived

from phytoplankton and detritus than it contributes to the food web.

     Because many oyster reefs are intertidal or shallow subtidal, they

exist constantly  at or near their  stress  tolerance  threshold.   Further

disturbance  may  destroy  an  entire  reef  community  (Table  3).

                                   31
<pb n="36" />

      Table 3.   GENERAL EFFECTS OF MAN-INDUCED STRESS ON OYSTERS
                            (from Bahr and Lanier 1981)

     Stress                                   Detectable Effects

1)  Sedimentation                     Burial and anoxia of adult oysters

2)  Salinity increase over            Increased predation and/or fouling
    ambient concentrations

3)  Oxygen depletion in               Toxic effects of blue qreen algae
    bottom water                      and other algae; excess particulate
     (Eutrophication)                  organic carbon

4)  Chemical Pollutants               Sublethal effects, increased mor-
                                     tality, reduced resistance to natural
                                     stress, subtle changes in entire
                                     community, reduced gametogenesis

5)  Physical effects of               Impairment of feeding mechanism
    oil-type pollutants

6)  Thermal loading                   Decreased community diversity,
                                     increased respiratory cost

 7)  Overharvesting                    Depletion of breeding stock and culch
                                     and decrease in bottom stability

8)  Loss of wetlands                  Loss of wetland-water interface prime
                                     reef habitat, decline of primary pro-
                                     duction

II C 6. UNVEGETATED SUBTIDAL BOTTOM AREAS

     Located below the photic zone or scattered throughout the estuary are

areas of unvegetated subtidal bottom.   Large patches (&gt;3m) of bare bottom

occur naturally in the photic zone due probably to high enerqy circulation

patterns.   Large bar-type bare sites may serve to lessen wave surges and

current velocities, providing calmer areas behind the bar. Natural defoli-

                                    32
<pb n="37" />

ation may result from herbivore feeding behaviors such as those described

by Bjorndal (1980) for green turtles (Chelonia mydas) and by Packard (1981)

concerning  West  Indian  manatees  (Trichechus manatus).   Reasons  for the

natural  existence  of small  patches  of bare  sand within expansive grass

flats remain questionable.   Blowouts, or bare sites within beds that con-

sistently  reject  seagrass  growth,  may  result  because  of  high  energy

patterns such as eddies that occur continuously at that particular location

(Durako, M.,  personal  communication).   Cryptic behavior of cownose rays

have caused total removal of Zostera communities (Orth 1977).  Many areas

where underlying rock layers protrude through the bottom surface are

unsupportive of seagrasses and macro algal beds (personal observation).

     Though reasons for their presence must exist, small sites of unvege-

tated subtidal  bottom probably are not very productive.   Orth (1977) de-

scribed sediment stability within these bare sites: storm activities pro-

duced  sand ripples  and erosion  of &lt;20cm in the bare  areas whereas  the

adjacent  Zostera community  indicated  no evidence  of instability.   Orth

concludes that this instability accounts for the lack of species and

individuals in this habitat.   Human-induced defoliations are numerous and

include activities such as motor boat propeller cuts, disposal of heated

effluent,   turbidity,   physical   removal,   and  hiqh  energy  circulation

patterns;  these  are  discussed  in  greater  detail  in  section  IVB.

3  I C 7.  WATER COLUMN

     Overlying parts  or all  of the  six other estuarine  habitats  is the

water column.  Several variables and, especially, the interactions between

                                   33
<pb n="38" />

the  variables,  cause  the  estuarine  water  column  to  exhibit  differing

physiochemical  characteristics.   Depending on the time of year,  time of

day, weather, tide and circulation patterns, the water column may be

extremely saline or fresh, clear or turbid, warm or cold, deep or shallow,

and calm or turbulent.  Further, it is capable of existinq in any combina-

tion of these features.  The water column is the medium through which most

marine fauna travel and feed.  It is dynamic and organisms living within it

must  be  tolerant  of  change.

    As the tide comes in, meroplanktonic stages entering the estuary can

rise to the top of the water column and profit by the free ride to safer

territory.   High tide also creates a feeding habitat for larger predators

by deepening those areas that physically excluded them during low tide.

Receding tides, in a sense, "cleanse" the estuary by removing nutrients

that may eventually serve as a food source for offshore systems.

     Phytoplankters are the primary producers of the water column. Compared

with  seagrasses,  mangroves,  and  salt  marshes,  productivity  values  for

phytoplankton are minimal (Table 2), however, phytoplankton productivity is

not limited to shallow areas (as are seagrasses) or shorelines (as are

marshes  and  mangroves).       Instead,  these  organisms  are  capable  of

reproducing in the photic zone over the total area of the system. Further,

phytoplankton exist in a state readily available to consumers.   In other

words, phytoplankton need not pass through the many steps of the vascular

plant detrital food web before consumption by "higher" organisms.  Although

the vascular plant detrital food chain may be most important in estuaries,

phytoplankters  are  essential  components  in  the  food  chain  supporting

zooplankton  and  larval  fishes.    Larval  fish  consume  zooplankton, and

                                   34
<pb n="39" />

zooplankton can consume detritus, however, almost all detrital consumers

include at least 10 to 20% fresh algal cells in their diet (Odum 1970).

II D. ESTUARINE FOOD WEB

    The  trophic  structure  of  estuaries  features  different  sources  of

primary production, numerous generalist feeders, and an intricate food web

(Day and Yanez-Arancibia 1982).   Zieman (1982) listed the main sources of

primary production:

     1.  Macrophytes - seagrasses, mangroves, macroalgae, and marsh grasses

    2. Benthic microalgae - benthic and epiphytic diatoms, dinoflagel-

         lates, filamentous green and blue green algae

     3. Phytoplankton

A diverse set of consumers contribute to the food web.  An organism rarely

fits exclusively into one category or level  due to changing food habits

resulting from age, time of year, and food availability (Odum and Heald

1972; Day and Yanez-Arancibia  1982).   Juvenile fish, for example,  switch

prey items as they grow.   Following is a list of estuarine consumers (Day

and Yanez-Arancibia 1982):

     1. First order consumers - pure herbivores, detritivores, and ominni-

        vores;  includes most zooplankton, filter feeders, fishes such as

        mullets and menhaden, benthic deposit feeders, shrimps, crabs, and

        most  other  fauna  of  wetlands.

     2. Second order consumers - organisms that consume mostly first order

        consumers and also small amounts of plant material and detritus;

         fishes  consuming  zooplankton  (anchovies  and  sardines,  for  ex-

                                   35
<pb n="40" />

         ample),  demersal  fishes  (such  as  croaker  and  catfish),  other

        crabs, and starfish.

    3. Third order consumers - exclusively carnivorous organisms that

        prey on first and second order consumers;  many larger fishes and

        birds.

    Two basic food chains exist within the estuary: the grazing food

chain and the detrital food chain.   Interactions between these two create

the complex food web of the estuary.  The grazing food chain is basically:

        primary producers  -- herbivores  -+ carnivores  -&gt; bacteria.

The detrital food chain is basically:

        detritus - bacteria -&gt; detritus feeders -&gt; carnivores

         bacteria.

The  detrital  chain  is  considered  by many  researchers  to  be  the  most

important of the two food chains (see Day and Yanez-Arancibia 1982).   The

process is based, obviously, not on living primary production, but on dead

material. After a mangrove leaf, Juncus shoot, Spartina shoot, or seagrass

blade  breaks  off  from  its  host  plant,  physical  breakdown  occurs

immediately.   The material is shredded into smaller fragments by crabs and

amphipods and quickly becomes colonized by bacteria, fungi, and microalgae.

These decomposers are considered rich sources of vitamins and proteins,

greatly increasing the food value of the material.   Heald and Odum (1970)

found that broken-down particles after 12 months contained 22% more protein

as compared to a protein content of 6% when they were still intact.   Net

nutrient value is much higher for detritus materials than for the plant

material  alone.   In addition, this rich source of food decomposes slowly,

insuring  a continuous  production  of food.   Mann  (1972; cited by Day and

                                   36
<pb n="41" />

Yanez-Arancibia 1982) states that the detrital colonizers are the actual

food source; the plant material passes through the gut systems of detrital

feeders almost unaltered.

     Eighty to  ninety  percent  of  the  nutrition  of  several  species  of

crustaceans, polychaetes, insect larvae, and small fishes is derived from

detritus (Robas 1970). Detritus feeders are consumed by over 60 species of

juvenile fishes that live in the estuary during at least parts of their

lives (Robas 1970).  However, no estuarine food web is completely dependent

upon vascular plant detritus, in fact, according to Odum (1970), detritus

consumers appear unable to grow and successfully reproduce when consuming

solely detritus. He adds that at least 10 to 20% algal cells in the form

of diatoms or filamentous and blue-green algae are included in the diets of

almost all detrital consumers.

                                    37
<pb n="42" />

38
<pb n="43" />

III.   ADJACENT LAND USE AND HABITAT ALTERATION

III A. ESTUARINE LIMITATIONS

    As discussed in Section II A, estuaries are extremely interactive,

highly dynamic ecosystems.   However, even though estuarine biota are quite

capable  of  withstanding  frequent  environmental  changes,  they  do  have

limitations.  In this section these boundaries will be described as well as

how they are exceeded and the resulting effects on estuarine habitats.

    Odum  and  Copeland  (1969)  described  three  main  energy  types  that

dominate estuarine systems:

    1.  Light energy activates  the process of photosynthesis and is the

         primary source of the estuarine food web.

     2.  Organic fuels constitute a second energy source.   Incoming nutri-

         ents flowing through the estuarine habitats "fertilize" the system

         resulting in an increase in vascular plants and algae.

     3.  Mechanical energy, such as waves, wind, river and stream flow, and

         tides serve as energy subsidies and are responsible for many

         interactions that occur in the estuary.

     A reduction in light energy, as might occur if estuarine waters became

turbid, would greatly affect the seagrass system.   Copeland (1965) tested

the effect of light reductions by lowering the input of sunlight from 1500

to 200 foot candles on a simulated seagrass community.  The community, pre-

viously dominated by Thalassia, soon became a blue-green algae community.

After stabilization, however, the productivity of the two community types

became equivalent.    But,  considering  that  blue-green  algae  is consumed

successfully by only a few species (Copeland 1965), as opposed to Thalassia

                                   39
<pb n="44" />

leaves and detritus that are consumed by numerous species, Thalassia

communities are much more useful, both as a food source and as a hiding

habi tat.

    Lessening the amounts of incoming organic fuels (commonly derived from

freshwater sources such as rivers and terrestrial run-off) would decreaseI

the biomass of all the systems - mangroves, salt marshes, seagrasses, and

phytoplankton.   However,  an overabundance of nutrients precedes eutrophi-

cation.    In  response  to  increased  nutrients,  productivity  increases

resulting in an increase in detrital material, but the amount of energy

required to breakdown this material  has not changed.   The system becomesI

eutrophicated and consists of sediments and a water column devoid of

oxygen.   Vascular plants die and the system begins to cease functioning.

    Mechanical energies within the estuary are numerous, and their

importance  cannot  be overemphasized.   For example,  tides and freshwater

inflows are responsible for the chemical properties of the water. If tidesI

were restricted from the estuary, freshwater would predominate and the

system would drastically change from a euryhaline system to a fresh system.I

Decrease  in freshwater  flows would cause  an increase in salinity.   The

numbers of molluscs, crustaceans, and fishes would rise, but the subtle

qualities  of  the  estuary  would  be  lost,  especially  its  value  as  a

protective nursery ground.

     Consistent high levels of dissolved oxygen do not occur in estuaries,I

due mostly to the large volume of organic matter in the surface sediments

and water column (Odum 1970). In fact, many estuaries possess a value wellI

below the standard of 4.0 mg 02 per liter water established for polluted

estuaries by the National Technical Advisory Committee in their 1968 report

                                  40
<pb n="45" />

          on water quality criteria to the Secretary of the Interior (Odum 1970).

          Odum (1970) theorized that since estuaries already exist in a borderline

            condition,  a decrease in dissolved oxygen content  is capable of causing

          mass  mortalities.    He  further  states  that  any  process  that  suspends

           oxidizable sediments also reduces the oxygen concentration of estuarine

          water  to  a level  unfit  for  normal  biota.   An  example  of this  occurs

           frequently in an unpolluted Everglades estuary during rainy season:   l arge

             volumes  of  cold  rainwater  sink  to  the  bottom  causing  resuspension  of

           detrital  materials.    Oxygen  is  depleted  and marine  animal  mortalities

U             follow.

                Although estuarine biota are capable of withstanding drastic tempera-

           ture fluctuations, they cannot deal with continuous heat or cold.  Severe

           cold  spells  cause  adult fish to migrate to offshore warmer waters,  and

           freezes destroy mangroves.   Many resi dent speci es of tropi cal  areas  are

              surviving within a few degrees of their upper lethal limit (Lindall 1973).

           Fishes rarely survive temperatures of 38'C, and waters typically exceeding

           350C would probably not support a large or diverse fish  population (Carr

           and Giese] 1975). Effects of excessive heat from natural sources have not

           been reported, but effects of heated effluent from power plants have been

           we]lI  documented.   Roessler and Zieman  (1969) found  adverse effects  from

           effluent emerging from Turkey Point Power Plant in southern Biscayne. Bay;

              nearly all biota within  125 acres nearest the outfall were destroyed or

           greatly  reduced.    By  comparing  two  thermally-influenced  creeks  to  an

           ambient  temperature  creek,  Carr  and  Giese]  (1975) found  a higher  fish

           density during summer months in the ambient creek.  In addition, Juveniles

           of species of commercial and recreational importance were 3 to 10 times

                                               41
<pb n="46" />

greater in biomass and numbers in the ambient creek than in the thermally

affected creeks.

    Two extremely important, but not easily defined, parameters that

greatly  influence  the  effects  of  various  perturbations,  are  time  and

multiple  interactions.    The  estuary  apparently can cope with  literallyI

almost any major alterations, but for only relatively short periods of

time.    For  example,  seagrasses  will  not  be  detrimentally  affected  by

turbidity if the condition exists for merely a week.  But further periods

of inundation may result in reduction of photosynthesis and decreased

production.

     Synergistic or multiple interactions are those perturbations that

occur coincidentally with others.   It is often difficult to separate the

effects of single disturbances when another, or others, are present as

well.    Using  the  seagrass  community  again  as  a hypothetical  example,

turbidity,  excessive  freshwater,  and  above  normal  nutrient  levels  are

simultaneously introduced into the seagrasses due to heavy rains and river

flooding.     Two  months  later,  after  the  system  returned  to  normalI

conditions, the seagrasses are thinner and less dense with fewer faunal

inhabitants. It would be difficult to pinpoint any single variable for the

results.

     In  summary,  a reduction  of  light  energy or  a reduction  or over-

abundance of organic fuels and mechanical energy, excessive changes in

chemical properties (oxygen and salinity) and temperature, or a combination

of  any  or  all,  since  all  variables  are  interrelated,  may  result  in

decreased  production.   Lowered productivity is realized through the food

chain  and  the  outcome  is  lower  yields  in  fish  stocks.

                                   42
<pb n="47" />

          III  B.    PERTURBATIONS

               Probably the greatest single disturbance that causes irreversible

            damage in the shortest period of time is physical removal of parts or all

          of the estuarine habitats.   Destruction of this type often occurs on a

          large-scale  and includes  activities  such as channel  dredging,  dredge and

          fill,  shell-mining,  and various sorts of shoreline modifications.   Small

          scale  perturbations  that  directly  and  physically  destroy  habitat  are

             produced from activities such as motorboat cuts and clam digging.  Anything

          that exceeds estuarine limitations, as discussed in the previous section,

H           either destroys  habitat  or reduces  productivity;  these  disturbances  may

          include the introduction into the estuary of power plant effluent, storm

          water  run-off,  industrial  discharges,  mosquito  impoundments  and  vessel

          discharges (gas and oil).

          Channel Dredging

                   Because estuarine habitats are relatively shallow and typically link

          the oceanic waters to the mainland, they pose transportation difficulties

          to large vessels and even small boats. To alleviate this problem, channels

          are cut into the sediment, providing deep areas for easy access through the

          shallow zone.   Odum (1970) explains that the dredging process would cause

*            minimal damage if properly engineered; only the actual area containing the

          navigation channel should be altered. However, Odum describes the continu-

          al adverse effects resulting from the "hydraulic dredge cycle".   Material

          dredged from channels is typically dumped as nearby spoil banks.  A s the

          spoil banks erode, dredged material is transported back into the channel,

          necessitating  re-dredging.    Turbidity  and  destruction  of  circulation

          patterns  are often  unavoidable by-products.   Lindall  and Saloman  (1977)

                                                              43
<pb n="48" />

reported outcomes of channel dredging that are significant to fishery

resources.   Physical loss of aquatic habitat by creation of spoil islands,

segmentation and isolation of' parts of the estuary, alteration of tidal

exchange and circulation patterns, increased turbidity, and destruction of

submergent and emergent vegetation are some of these significant problems.
Mosquito Impoundments and Ditches

    Mosquitoes, as adults, pose a threat to the health and sanity of

people  and yet,  as larvae,  serve as food for juvenile fishes.   Unfortu-.

nately, both mosquitoes and humans wish to occupy the same coastal areas --

humans, because of the aesthetic qualities, and mosquitoes because of theirU

need for moist, exposed soil on which to lay eggs.  Higher intertidal salt

marsh and mangrove areas provide exceptional habitat on which mosquitoes

lay eggs.  To help eradicate mosquitoes, a dike is built around the system

or channels are dug through  it.   Dikes serve to retain water within the

system while canals dry it out.   They change an occasionally-flooded area

to  one  continuously  flooded  or  to  one  persistently  dry.    Diking  and

channelization remove the influence of tides and the inflow of terrestrial
freshwater and, therefore,  a part of the nutrient import.   Estuarine fauna

are no longer capable of moving into and out of the site, and its import-

ance as habitat for growing fishes and shellfish is destroyed.  Harringtonj

and Harrington (1982) reported that during a few months following impound-

ment  of a salt marsh  community  in  Indian  River  County,  nearly  all  theI

vegetation died and juvenile fish that originally used the site previous to

impoundment disappeared as well.   Of 16 species found before impoundment,

only  five  remained  after  impoundment  (Harrington  and  Harrington  1982,

1961.)   GilImore  et  al .  (1982) found  a total  of  12 species within  the

                                   44I
<pb n="49" />

           Harrington's impounded site as compared to 41 species in an impounded site

           that was reopened to tidal influence via a single 80 cm culvert.

              Power Plants

                To cool the operating system of electrical generating power plants,

           water  is essential.   Placement  of a power plant  adjacent  to an estuary

           provides easy access to a direct source of required cooling water.  After

           the water is used,  it is deposited back into the estuary.   The foremost

             perturbation  the  power  plant  provides  to  the  estuary  is  the  direct

              destruction of shoreline habitat, usually mangroves and marsh, to build the

           plant. Three additional problems are as follows:

                    1.  Impingement - organisms can get trapped on screens that filter the

                    intake water.

                2. Entrainment - organisms of the intake water that pass through the

                    filter system can be killed or damaged by the turbulent and

                         pressurized process of the cooling system.

                3.  Thermal  effects  - the  impact  of  thermal  pollution  depends  on

                    several variables - discharge volume, average and maximum tempera-

                    ture elevations, characteristics of plume dispersion, and hydro-

                    graphy of receiving waters.  In addition to the reports discussed

                    in  Part  I of  this  section,  another  investigation  found  that

                    thermal effects from a coal-fired power plant destroyed 200 acres

                    of seagrasses and lowered the diversity of invertebrates to 40% of

  3                      their original value (Blake et a]. 1976).

           Sewage Di sposal

 3                  "The greatest  direct  threat  to the clear  productive  waters  of the

           Charlotte Harbor area is inadequately treated and improperly disposed

         *                                                     45
<pb n="50" />

domestic  wastes"  (U.S.  Department  of  the  Interior,  Bureau  of  Land

Management, 1978). As described in Section III, estuaries provide an ideal

site for the disposal of secondary-treated sewage.   However, the addition

of primary-treated sewage contains more nutrients than the system can

properly handle.   A study of Hillsborough Bay found progressive eutrophi-

cation after years of receiving primary treatment (Federal Water Pollution

Control Administration, 1969). Water quality was lower as compared to all

other parts of Tampa Bay; measurements of dissolved oxygen were low, coli-

form bacteria surpassed safe levels, sediments became anoxic, and frequent

noxious algal fish kills and blooms occurred.   In addition, diversity and

abundance of macroinvertebrates were lowered (Taylor et al. 1970).

Canals and Canal Developments

     During the 1950's and 1960's, demand for waterfront property in the

southern  half  of  Florida  was  immense.    Developers  met  this  need  by

extensively exploiting the coastline.  Available shoreline was limited, so

developers  planned  communities  around  networks  of  branching  canals,

maximizing the amount of waterfront property to land configuration.   Some

of these  canal  systems  extend  inland over thousands  of acres.   Morris

(1981) distinguishes three basic designs of waterfront canals:

     1.  Bay-fill or finger-fill canals:  those constructed below mean low

         tide by dredging and filling shallow bay bottoms.

     2.  Intertidal  developments:    those  constructed  by dredge-and-fill

         between mean low and mean high water, typically in mangroves, salt

         marshes, bays, estuaries, lakes, or other wetlands.

     3.  Inland or upland canals:  those developed by excavating land above

         mean high tide and connecting the canals to natural channels,

                                    46
<pb n="51" />

                    lakes, rivers, bays, or other natural or artificial waterways.

                In the past, canal developments were usually constructed by dredging

             out  the  channels,  first,  and  depositing  the  dredged  material  behind

           bulkheads, or seawalls, elevating the land surface to meet State criteria

           for hurricane tide and flood protection  (Morris 1981).   During construc-

j             tion,  mangroves,  seagrasses,  and  trees  were  removed  from  the  dredge

           location, and the fill material covered vegetation located in the landfill

           sites, often destroying estuaring nursery sites over vast areas.   Lindall

           and Saloman (1977) determined that 23,521 acres of Florida estuaries have

U             been  filled,  the majority for  housing developments  and  industrial  real

           estate.

                Three major deleterious effects of canal developments are apparent,

*            irrespective  of  less  obvious  concurrent  impacts:

                1.  The  immediate  destruction  of  habitat  at  the  construction  site.

                    2.  The presence of seawalls at the land/water interface, eliminating

                    critical habitat for the development of estuarine shoreline vege-

                    tation.   This, in turn, eradicates nursery habitat, as well as a

  *                      cleansing  site  for  incoming  water.

                3.' The inability of circulation patterns to adequately flush the

                    waters and carry undesirable pollutants to the receiving water

                    body,  and/or  maintain  a sufficient  concentration  of  dissolved

                    oxygen throughout the water column of the entire canal network.

 3                  Fortunately,  the  direct  causes  of water  degradation  within  canal

           systems  were  clear.    The  documentation  of  canal  problems  resulted  in

           restrictive  legislation,  causing  a  si gni f icant  decrease- in  canal

           construction.    However,  canal  developments  continue  to  be  permitted.

                                                               47
<pb n="52" />

Perhaps these developers can follow the less negative approach to canal

design  as devised  by Morris  (1981) and discussed  in Section  IV D.   Of

course, the best approach is to completely ban the construction of

canals.

Stormwater  Run-off

    When  rainfall  occurs,  much  of  the  water  perculates  through  the

ground.   It is cleansed by the soil and lower rock layers and enters the

groundwater  system.    When  rainwater  falls  on  land  it  can  enter  the

estuary via rivers and streams as terrestrial run-off, relatively clean but

full  of nutrients.   The remainder enters the estuary via storm pipes asI

run-off from roads, lawns, parking lots, and agricultural cropland.   This

run-off may contain pollutants such as pesticides, gasoline, oil, heavy

metals, and fine particles of rubber and asbestos.  Odum (1970) termed the

influence of these pollutants "sub-lethal effects", and described it as a

poorly understood  occurrence.    Butler  (1966) has shown that widespread

pesticide pollution significantly decreases the production of estuarine

fish and shellfish. Anderson and Peterson (1969) discovered that sublethal

concentrations of DOT prevented the establishment of a visual conditioned

avoidance response in some fish and also affected the thermal acclimation

mechanisin.

Industri al Di scharge

     In Florida, phosphate is the prevalent mineral extracted from theI

ground.  Phosphate plants, like power plants, require a cooling system that

utilizes water, therefore, Florida phosphate plants typically are found on

rivers  or on estuarine  shorelines.   Upchurch  et  al.  (1976) found that

effluent from a phosphate processing plant in Hillsborough Bay was heated

                                  48I
<pb n="53" />

           to 18'C above ambient water temperatures, contained much fluoride, and was

           a ci dic. The discharge caused the disappearance of all animals within 61

           hectares, and diversity and abundance were low where organisms did occur.

           Phosphate strip mining and processing plants established far upstream

           affect the estuary. Though outflow water temperatures have probably cooled

           by the time they reach the estuary, the chemical contaminants would no

           doubt be sustained within the outflow.

              Miscellaneous  Activities

                Numerous  additional   activities  that  affect  estuarine  production

           continuously occur. Vessels, whether they are large, small, commercial, or

           recreational,  release  gas  and oil  into the water.   Larger vessels  are

           capable of producing wakes that may disturb quiet areas and cause detri-

              mental  affects  such  as stripping  newly established  vegetation  from the

           sediments.   Motorboat  scars  within  seagrass meadows  persist  for years

           (Zieman  1976).   The construction  and placement of causeways  and bridges

           destroys  habitat  of the  immediate  site.   After  stabilization,  however,

           estuarine vegetation may sometimes return depending on boat activity, wave

           action, turbidity,  and other factors influencing reestablishment.   Cause-

           ways additionally alter circulation patterns that can severely affect some

              areas.   Oil  spills  can  cause extensive  damage.   Oyster  shell  dredging

*             creates temporary turbid conditions within approximately 30 meters of the

           site, in addition to a reduced organic content within the sediment, a 40%

           loss in species, a 66% loss in abundance, and an 87% loss in biomass.

           Within six to 12 months, however, these parameters can become naturally

           restored  to  pre-dredge  conditions  (Conner  and  Simon  1979).

                                                               49
<pb n="54" />

Cumulative Effects

    The health and well being of estuaries is based not on an impact of a

solitary activity, but rather on the accumulated effects of all activities,I

since the whole estuarine system is interrelated and interactive. Estevas

(1981) states:

     "In Coastal Ecosystem Management,  Clark (1977) names or dis-I
    cusses nearly 100 activities with adverse estuarine impact. The
    permutations of just those activities possibly relevant to south-
    west Florida estuaries all profoundly numerous, and of inestimableI
    impact due to the many variables involved. This does not mean,
    however, that cumulative impacts cannot be anticipated, identified,
    or managed. For all purposes, recent efforts to protect Charlotte
    Harbor by its designation as a complex of aquatic preserves, and
    possibly as an area of critical state concern, represents the
    emergence of public concern for cumulative (additive and inter-

     active) effects (CHPRMC, 1980)."

                                              50
<pb n="55" />

                                       IV. RESTORATION

                    Estuarine  shorelines  and, nearby shallow waters  provide the  perfect

          ecological  environment  for  salt  marshes,  mangroves,  and  seagrasses,

          however, this same shoreline aesthetically appeals to many humans as well.

          Unfortunately, in many areas of Florida, humans who dwell along shorelines

          do  not  want  to  coexist  with  native  habitats.    Instead,  they  live  on

          shoreline  habitat  restructured  by developers.   An anonymous  author once

    woe No thought has been given to the fact that the highly-
                   touted offshore fishing in this area of retirement homes
                    is directly related to the very mangrove swamps being
                   destroyed to make homes for the fishermen.
                Present knowledge linking the estuarine system to such important

U             entities as growth and survival of juvenile fish and shellfish, shoreline

           stabilization, water quality, and food production has led scientists into

          the complex realm of habitat restoration. Of course, the simplest and most

3             inexpensive "method" is preservation, in other words, absolutely no adverse

           effects  due to development  shall  occur.   For  areas  already  destroyed,

              preservation is of course, impossible;  only future development can employ

           this procedure. Next to preservation is conservation -- if a project must

           be constructed at a specific location resulting in damage to natural

3            systems,  then  the  construction  process  should  cause the  least  possible

           deleterious  effects.   Mitigation  is also a choice, but still  results  in

           destruction of habitat in trade for preservation or re-establishment of

           another site. This section addresses (1) post-development sites devoid of

              native vegetation,  where vegetative restoration  is indeed a possibility,

           and  (2)   miscellaneous  restorative and pre-development  concerns  such as
<pb n="56" />

spoil  island  configuration,  bulkhead  alternatives,  and  rational  canal

design.   Various techniques of restoration  are discussed,  and those with

best results will  be delineated.   The reader should always keep in mind

that each restoration site is unique with different flow patterns and water

regimes, varying sediment compositions, and other parameters.  Restorative

capacity is, therefore, peculiar to each site where restoration has or will

occur.

IV A. SEAGRASS RESTORATION

    The major methods  of reestablishing  a seagrass population  are seed

cultivation or transplantation of plugs, turfs, or sprigs, possibly apply-

ing hormone treatments executed at different times of the year.  The dis-

cussion is limited to reports of seagrasses that occur in Florida waters.

     Plugs:  A plug of seagrass is composed of seagrass blades, roots, and

rhizomes with attached sediment.   A plug is removed from the transplant

site with a shovel or post hole digger and transported intact to the

recipient site.  A hole is dug into which the plug is placed; an anchor or

sediment cover holds it in place.   Plugs are typically spaced one meter

apart.   Disadvantages to this system are the damages it induces to the

donor site, the substantial time and labor requirements, and the slowness

of  regrowth,  especially  of Thalassia  (Godcharles  1971).   Kelly et  al.

(1971) was unsuccessful  in applying this technique to Thalassia in Boca

Ciega Bay.  Van Breedveld (1976), however, had 100% survival of Syringodium

in Tampa Bay by using a post hole digger and planting in rows in early

spring.  Lewis and Phillips (1980) planted plugs in a small borrow area of

the Florida Keys that had silted in with fine calcareous sand and silt.

                                   52
<pb n="57" />

They had  35% survival  for  Syringodium  and  37% for  Thalassia;  Halodule

plugs, however, failed.

    Turfs:  A turf is a large clump of sediment with seagrasses.  A turf

is removed from the donor site and placed into a shallow trench at the

recipient  site.    Disadvantages  are  the  same  as  described  for  plugs.

Phillips  (1974) had  no  success  with  Thalassia  in Tampa  Bay,  probably

because of erosion by currents, but Halodule exhibited some success.  Van

Breedveld (1975) concluded that turf transplants are most preferable.   He

suggested that the clumps be planted in rows, spaced 30 cm apart in

favorable  substrates,  and  closer  in  unfavorable  substrates  with  donor

sediment in between.

     Sprigs:   Sprigs  are single  "plants"  composed  of the blades,  short

shoot, roots, and maybe the rhizomes, but no sediment.  The donor site is

affected less deleteriously, but stress on the plant itself might be much

greater.  Kelly et al. (1971) planted sprigs of Thalassia without rhizomes

in Boca Ciega Bay; 11 of 60 plants survived.   Lewis and Phillips  (1980)

reported a failure of nearly 100% of Thalassia, Halodule, and Syringodium

using springs in a borrow area of the Florida Keys.

     Seeds:  Thorhaug (1974) gathered Thalassia fruits from Caribbean beds

and immediately separated  the seeds.   The seeds were  transported  under

recirculating sea water and planted in the denuded Turkey Point Power Plant

discharge canal in Biscayne Bay.  After 2.5 years, the transplant site was

moderately dense.   After 4 years,  blade density was 2000/rn2 as compared

with 2295/m2 at a control site.  Lewis and Phillips (1980) reported nearly

100% failure  of planting Thalassia  seeds  and  seedlings  in  a silted-in

borrow area created by dredging.

                                   53
<pb n="58" />

     Durako and Moffler (1981) reported 100% success in planting laboratory

seedlings in peat pellets (compressed dehydrated peat containing low grade

fertilizer);  plants  exhibited, healthy  leaf  growth  after  3 months, and

maintained  good health in situ for over 6 months.   The transplant  site

however, presented unsuitable growth parameters of high sedimentation and

turbidity, therefore, field results were inconclusive.

     Durako and Moffler (1981) described several physiological variables

that must be considered when choosing seed stock for restoration projects:

         When considering seed stock for mitigation projects, the
          possibility of genetic fixing in local strains may be im-
          portant (Odum, 1971). Geographically separated T. testudi-
          num populations exhibit ecoplastic limits that are adaptive
          To-local conditions (McMillan, 1978, 1979; McMillan and
          Phillips, 1979). Response to the influence of habitat in-
          clude variation in leaf length and width (Phillips, 1960;
          Zieman, 1974) and variable reproductive patterns (Grey and
          Moffler, 1978; Moffler and Durako, unpublished data). In
          this regard, transplanting seeds or seedlings from remote
          locations may result in failure or poor success since they
          lack this factor compensation.  The possibility of pathogen
          introduction utilizing nonlocal seeds also suggests that
          indigenous seed stock would be preferable for revegetation
          projects.

     An important consideration for seagrass restoration projects is the

feasibility for growth  at the recipient  site.   Thorhaug  (1980) planted

seedlings in 4 types of high stress environments in Biscayne Bay: areas of

submerged dredge spoil, bottoms damaged by sewage pollution, areas of high

tidal currents, and areas of shifting sand.  Low survival occurred in areas

of strong tidal currents, those with wave action from boats, and the dredge

spoil site that was experiencing erosion and sediment shifting.   Suitable

sites for seedling growth included areas of low energy with peaty bottoms

consisting  of  sandy,  consolidated  sediments.

                                    54
<pb n="59" />

    Miscellaneous Techniques:  Fonseca et al. (1979) removed Halodule (and

Zostera) from donor beds and rapidly transported them to a processing area.

Terminal shoots were separated'and woven into pre-cut biodegradable 20 x 20

cm mesh paper, with 15 shoots per O.04m2 mesh.  The squares were placed 1 m

apart in a 6 x 6 m plot and attached to the substrate with sharp pins. The

logic behind this complex technique is a compromise between recovery time

and cost:   revegetating only a small  portion of the damaged area to an

advanced stage of succession.   Though apparently successful,  it is time

consuming, costly, and labor intensive.

     Hormone treatments (mostly the use of Naphthalene Acetic Acid -NAA)

appear to exhibit no consistent results.   In his work with pluq and sprig

transplants, Van Breedveld (1975, 1976) reported no advantages from using

hormone treatments.   Thorhaug (1974), however, found that seeds soaked in

NAA solution appeared to increase root propagation.   Kelly et al. (1971)

reported 100% success in transplanting sprigs without rhizomes that were

first dipped into NAA solution previous to planting.  Whether the success-

ful attempts were due to hormone treatment or to other parameters such as

viability  of  the  recipient  site  and  the  restoration  technique  itself

remains questionable.

     The season in which restoration is attempted may play an important

role in successful projects. Saurs (1981) and Van Breedveld (1975) suggest

early spring as optimal for planting since seagrasses exist in a semi-

dormant  state  during  this  time.    Saurs  (1981) also  emphasized  that

historical changes must also be considered, i.e., if seagrasses are

disappearing within an area, restoration may prove useless.  Disturbance to

the system is causing their demise and any restorative attempts may fail.

                                   55
<pb n="60" />

     In summary,  investigators  must  choose  between  several  alternatives

before  attempting  restoration  of a seagrass  bed.   Selection  concerning

which restoration techniques to use, when to plant, the use or disuse of a

hormone  treatment,  cost  considerations,  and,  most  important,  the

receptivity of the recipient site must all be considered.  A final option

regards which species to place into the new site.   Often, the system has

changed extensively and new growth of the original species may not be

feasible.   Thorhaug  (1980) noted that some investigators plant Halodule

because it grows faster, however, she argues against this reasoning because

Halodule might not support a faunal system as large or diverse as those

maintained by Thalassia beds, nor does it apparently function to stabilize

sediments as well. Lewis and Phillips (1980) suggest that Thalassia exists

as  the  climax  species  in  an  ecological  succession  with  Halodule  and

Syringodium;  Halodule roots are shallow and it grows quickly, Syringodium

has deeper roots and grows slower than Halodule, and Thalassia has the

deepest roots and grows the slowest of all three.  Reasons describing why

one site is better suited than another for a particular species are

multitudinous, and basically unknown (M. Durako, personal communication).

The  reader  is  referred  to  Coastal  Engineering  Technical  Aid  No.  30-2

(Phillips,  1980) and a bibliography on seagrass planting and propagation

techniques  (Knight  et  al.  1980) prepared  for  the  U.S.  Army,  Corps  of

Engineers, Coastal Engineering Research Center, for more information

regarding seagrass restoration.

                                   56
<pb n="61" />

IV B.  MANGROVE RESTORATION

     Lewis (1981) described some of the major reasons for the recent in-

creased  interest  in mangrove  restoration:    (1) the  value  of mangrove

forests  has  been  realized  and  documented;  (2)  large-scale  losses  of

mangroves  have  occurred;  and  (3)  legal  authority  has  been  granted  to

regulatory agencies to control destruction of mangroves through develop-

ment and to establish fines, replanting requirements, and other mitigation

procedures.

     Teas (1980) describes one goal for mangrove restoration: to develop a

functional, diverse ecosystem as rapidly as possible.   He suggests  (1981)

several short cuts that rapidly establish a mature system. Dense planting

and planting larger trees help accelerate development.   Faster growth  is

achieved with fertilizer treatments.   Large block plantings as opposed to

scattered plantings are favored since larger forests harbor a more diverse

fauna.   If the site is distant from other mangroves, introducing inverte-

brates, algae, and other fauna could accelerate development  (Teas  1980).

     Substrate stabilization appears to be one of the most important

functions of mangroves.   Since black mangroves form dense root mats, they

may serve as better stabilizers than red mangroves (Savage 1972;  Carlton

1974). White mangroves also grow dense root mats; they, too, can stabilize

substrate (Teas 1981).  Lewis and Dunstan (1975) suggested achievement of

rapid stabilization by first planting Spartina alterniflora and then

planting mangroves within the Spartina.  Pulver (1975) suggested plantinq

mangroves  in  greater  densities,  then  allowing  natural  overcrowding  and

competition or artificial thinning to occur.

                                   57
<pb n="62" />

    Four basic methods of mangrove reestablishment have been applied:

planting of propagules, planting nursery-grown seedlings, transplanting

from field stocks, and air layering.  These methods are herein described as

well as some common decisions and problems encountered in the field.

     Planting propagules:   This method  simply involves collecting propa-

gules and placing them into the substrate at the restoration site.

    Most restoration failures of planting seeds or seedlings appear to

occur due to high wave energy.   This form of stress physically undermines

and removes plant material before it becomes established (Hoffman et al.,

in prep.).   Natural  high wave energy is caused by strong winds, but boat

wakes constitute an induced stress, especially in well-used recreation

areas. Teas et al. (1975) planted 178 young Rhizophora seedlings on a St.

Lucie River site that was subjected to waves from boat traffic; after 7

months, there were no survivors.   However, a nearby low energy site had a

dense growth of mangroves  after 5 years (Teas et al. 1975).  After plant-

ing 60,000 Rhizophora propagules on a low energy site in Charlotte Harbor,

the same authors reported 85 to 90% survival  after one year.  Teas (1977)

reported 100% survival after 5 months of small pot-grown mangroves of all

species planted along a low energy canal.   The establishment of a "rocky"

berm in areas prone to high wave energy in order to absorb destructive

water movements are sometimes used; this berm should be high enough to

inhibit waves, but porous enough to allow tidal infiltration.

     If planted or growing too low in the tidal zone, mangroves are subject

"Sphaeroma disease."   Sphaeroma terebrans is an isopod parasite that bores

into mangrove roots and stems, weakening them and making them more

vulnerable to adverse effects of wave stress.  Hannan (1975) reported that

                                   58
<pb n="63" />

             all  mangroves  planted  10 cm  too  low in the tidal  zone were  killed  by

          Sphaeroma, but trees planted above this level were not attacked.

                Nursery-grown mangroves: -This method involves the growth of mangroves
          in an artificial environment and transplanting them to restorative sites.

          Evans et al. (1978) described how several methods of treatment affected

           growth  and  survival  of  mangrove  seeds.         Mulched  soils  (50%  grass

           clippings/50% soil) enhanced growth rates of red and black mangroves, but

          had no effect on survival of reds and an undetermined effect on survival of

           blacks.  Salt additions increased survival for both reds and blacks but was

           ineffective  on  growth  rate.    Fertilizers  showed  no  effect  for  red

              mangroves, but were detrimental to blacks.   Various watering schedules did
           not affect red mangroves, but blacks exhibited greater survival after one

              watering  per week.   These  authors  suggested  that  black mangrove  seeds,

           prior  to planting,  be soaked  until  their  seed coats  fall  off and roots

           start growing.

                Transplanting mangroves:   This method involves the removal  of plants

           from a donor site and replanting them at a recipient site.  Pulver (1976)

              developed guidelines for transplanting mangroves:
                (1) The top and side branches should be pruned to approximately

                    2/3 of the original length.

                (2) A root ball diameter about 112 the original tree height

                    should be retained.

                (3) At the recipient site, when replacing soil in the hole,

                    the root ball should be watered and pushed down to insure

                         a seal between it and the sides of the hole.

                (4) The plant should be placed at about the same substrate

                                                               59
<pb n="64" />

        depth and the same tidal elevation as the original source

        site.

     (5) Plants should not be placed into unstable substrates.

Hoffman  and Rogers  (1980) successfully applied these methods but without

initial  pruning.    They  reported  73.3%  success  after  13  months  for

transplanting red and black mangroves on a dredge spoil island in Tampa

Bay on an area of low wave energy and proper elevation.   Hannan  (1975)

transplanted  4-year old  root balled  red mangroves  at or above mid-tide

range in the Jensen Beach area; after 13 months, 85 to 100% survived. Teas

(1977) transplanted 14 black mangroves and white mangroves that were

previously root-pruned and top-pruned at the time of translocation; after 6

months, all were dead. Teas attributes these losses not to pruning, but to

improper handling.

     Mangrove Air Layering:   Air layering serves as an untried method of

restoration.  Short sections of bark and phloem are stripped to the cambiam

and wrapped with Sphagnum moss and aluminum foil to retain moisture. Roots

soon emerge from the "layers".  To form new trees, stems may be cut under-

neath the layers and planted at a new location. Carlton and Moffler (1978)

observed root growth 5 to 6 months following layering with 39% success for

red  mangroves,  35%  for  white  mangroves,  and  6%  for  black  mangroves.

Further investigations by the Department of Natural Resources (DNR) Bureau

of Marine Research indicate that root growth requires 4-6 months with

success rates of 87.5% for whites, 60.4% for reds, and 12.5% for black

mangroves (D. Crewz, personal communication). Investigators at DNR suggest

that air layering be performed just before the rainy season to take

advantage of higher humidities and temperatures, however, they warn that

                                   60
<pb n="65" />

          too  much  water  may  lead  to  fungal/bacterial  infection.    Air  layering

          provides larger planting material without the labor-intensive costs of

              growing nursery plants or the-loss of plants from source sites associated

          with  transplanting.    Addi ti onallIy,  air  layering  allows  for  phenotypic

          selection for specific traits (D. Crewz, personal communication).

                In summary, restoration of mangrove stands and even the introduction

          of mangroves  into new sites  is highly feasible.   Planting in recipient

             sites of low wave energy and fairly stable substrate appears to enhance

          survival. Berms or another method of lowering wave stress can be placed at

           sites  of  high  wave  energy.    All  four  methods  of  restoration  exhibit

           successful results when guidelines are properly followed.   Fehri ng et al .

           (1979) stress the importance of community acceptance and assistance with

          projects at or near developed areas.   They further point out that most of

          the habitat restoration projects are run by government agencies - these

U            projects are assured of long-term commitments in most cases.   Developers,

          too should be responsible for long-term commitments, i.e., successful re-

           establishment and not just initial plantings.

           IV C. SALT MARSH RESTORATION

                   As with seagrasses and mangroves, the importance of marsh vegetation

           is well-known  and documented.   Present  salt marshes  occupy calm waters

           subject to tidal influences; restored marshes prefer the same habitat.  In

           planning for a restored site with the ultimate veqetative composition in

          mind, Hunt (1979) suggested that investigators first observe the species

           composition of nearby marshes (if any) occurring at the same elevations as

           the site to be restored.   Local species may be more likely to invade and

         3                                                    61
<pb n="66" />

colonize the area.   Like mangroves,  salt marsh revegetation has incorpo-

rated three methods:   planting seeds and transplanting field and nursery

stock.

    Seeds:  If water levels maintain relatively shallow depths during the

time of seed germination and establishment or the site is located in the

upper portion of the tidal zone, revegetation by seeds may have positive

results; tidal  action may otherwise dislodge seeds (Hunt 1979).   Darovec

et al. (1975) recommended collecting cord grass seeds at least 3.Om from

the seaward edge of the marsh. Woodhouse et al. (1972) describe the proper

techniques of handling seeds  and Darovec et al.  (1975) summarized these

procedures:   seeds should be stored in seawater between 1.7-3.3°C for two

to four months.   Seeds planted in vivo require 6 to 25mm substrate over

them to prevent being washed away.

     Transplants:   Depending on the species, various harvest methods have

been suggested for different types of marsh vegetation. 15cm plugs of

Spartina alterniflora and S. patens should be removed from a mature marsh

in random locations, however, Juncus stock should be removed from one site

since the plant is easily destroyed by human traffic (Hoffman et al, in

prep.).    Plugs  of  Spartina  can  be  planted  intact,  or  separated  into

individual stalks, which reduces collection labor since one plug supplies

many stalks (Hoffman et al., in press).   Removing the top 1/3 of Juncus

shoots  reduces  aerial  transpiration  and allows greater ease in handling

(Hoffman et al., in press).  If high tide covers the cut top, survival is

reduced  (Coultas,  1980).  Some important techniques for transplanting are

described by Darovec et al. (1975):

     1. "Transplants should be removed beyond 15 ft. from the

                                   62
<pb n="67" />

         seaward edge of the marsh, taken in alternating square

         yards in checkerboard array.  Three to five plants should

         remain in the center of each thinned square yard."

    2.  "Cordgrass and needlerush should be removed by shovel.

         To minimize erosion, holes should be refilled with soil

         rinsed from plant roots. Bare root plantings will work

         satisfactorily if plants are kept moist and are not ex-

         posed to direct sunlight.  When transportation is involved,

         roots can be kept in buckets of seawater or in wet burlap

         sacks."

    3.  "Marsh transplanting should be done in winter and early

         spring, preferably after the coastal storm season."

    4.  "Salt marsh plants should be planted in rows paralleling

         the shoreline, cordgrass nearest the shoreline, plants

          18-24 inches apart."

    Coultas (1980) recommended that transplants with one or more buds be

used since these will  produce more leaves and a greater height.  He also

noted that "Rootone" (a commercial growth regulator) produces deleterious

effects.

     Hoffman  and Rogers  (1980) performed  an S.  alterniflora restoration

project on dredge material  in Hillsborough Bay.   Plugs of S. alterniflora

were planted on a 1.64 ha. site of low wave energy and a favorable tide

regime.   The 12cm plugs were placed one meter apart (center to center) in

rows two meters  apart.   After  14 months,  93.4% survived.   Hunt  (1979)

reported that sprigs of Spartina alterniflora grew well when planted 0.3,

                                   63
<pb n="68" />

0. 6, and O. 9m apart, but I1.8 and 2. 7m spaci ngs resul ted i n poor survi val.

Spartina patens, however, grew best at spacings of 1.8 and 2.7m (Hunt

1979) .  Hunt additionally found that seeds grew with greater success than

spri gs.

IV D.  MISCELLANEOUS RESTORATION TECHNIQUESI

    Spoil  Island  Configuration:    The  initial  formation  and  subsequent

maintenance of ship and boat channels requires huge amounts of sediments to

be dredged up. The sediments are typically dumped as random piles or spoilI

islands, adjacent to the channel sites, sometimes without regard to island

configuration in relation to current flow and ensuing erosion. Many times,

these islands quickly erode back into the channel necessitating further

dredging.   In Tampa Bay, for example, three spoil islands were created in

1931.   By 1957, two  islands  had completely  eroded  away.   However,  the

remaining island shifted continuously, and finally stabilized forming a

horseshoe shape with distinct  arms.   By 1966, one arm was shortened  and

curved  around  forming  a  lagoon.        A  mixed  mangrove  habitat  became

established and by 1979 the island served as a nesting site for 13 species

of birds.

     Lewis  and  Dunstan  (1974)  suggested  several  methods  to  correctly

configure inevitable spoil islands.  These suggestions were recommended forI

a proposed Tampa Bay harbor deepening project, but can also be applied to

other proposed channel  sites as well.   The overall shape of the new spoil

island should describe a three-to-one ratio of length to width.   Stabili-

zation can be achieved more quickly through the establishment of oyster

                                   64
<pb n="69" />

U             reefs  and vegetation  such as mangroves.   An artificial  reef composed of

           surplus construction materials can be built to minimize wave action and

           protect the shoreline.

                Bulkhead Alternatives:   Seawalls not only deprive the estuary of the

           important shallow intertidal gradient between dry land and water, but they

           also provide residents with  an impersonal  and false view of the natural

           world. There are less obtrusive methods of changing or creating shoreline

              to allow man to live adjacent to water.  One method is to leave the natural

           vegetation and allow the mangroves and salt marsh to control erosion, a

           task for which they were so well designed.   Houses built on stilts elevate

*            their  residents  and  provide  not  only  a scenic  view  over  the  natural

           shoreline vegetation, but also assurance against storm and hurricane tides.

             The  natural  shoreline  additionally provides  habitat  for  numerous  birds,

           fish,  and invertebrates.   Depending -on the shoreline width,  it may also

           help cleanse water flowing through it.
                A second method is to build a low wall of rip-rap.  Rip-rap, with its

           wealth of crevices, holes, and surface area, provides a habitat for algae

           and invertebrates.   It may also provide protection  for inqrowing mangove

           seedlings and other shoreline vegetation. It is relatively inexpensive and

              extremely strong and stable.   Depending on the material used to create the

           rip-rap wall, it can also be aesthetically appealing.

           Rational Canal Design:

                The  early  approach  to  canal  designing  was  to maximize waterfront

           property  in  relation  to  shoreline -space.   Traditional  desiqns  provided

              little potential for effective flushing.   This most always leads to water

           quality and biological degradation.   However, Morris (1981) states that on

                                                                65
<pb n="70" />

a day to day basis, small amplitude tides, supplemented by periodic winds,

in most cases provides enough energy for flushing, if the canal was

designed properly. Obtaining the required energy, as Morris continues, canI

be accomplished by (1) eliminating unnecessary energy losses due to

mechanical reasons such as right-angle bends, deep holes, and culverts and

biological inbalances such as the absence of natural filtering action and

nutrient  uptake  provided  by vegetation  and  aquatic  organisms,  and  (2)

utilizing open channels to optimize mixing.

    A good example of rational canal designing is demonstrated by a canal

network currently under construction along the intracoastal waterway south

of Jupiter, Florida. The site includes (Morris 1981):

             meandering channels
             large areas of intertidal channelsI
             sloping, vegetated banks
             elimination of dead ends
             increased tidal prism
             freshwater flow over salinity structuresI
             more uniform change in section through tidal
             entrances
             natural preserves set aside along the water
             The rational approach to canal design includes
             common sense planning, in-depth data collection,
             the correct application of physical chemical
             biological and ecological principles, and the
             use of judgement. The method cannot guarantee
             that a given design will function as planned,I
             but it will provide the kind of guidance needed
             for environmentally compatible development.

     Water Quality Improvements:

     Indirect  problems,  in  many  cases,  causes  the  disappearance  ofI

estuarine vegetation,  especially seagrasses.   Poor water quality such as

high  levels  of  organics  and/or  pollutants,  high  turbidity,  and  poor

                                  .66
<pb n="71" />

              circulation  oftentimes  is  the  cause.    Restoring  vegetative  habitats,

          especially seagrasses, in an area of poor water quality, would probably
            result  in  a  failed  attempt., Several  methods  exist  to  improve  water

              quality; these, of course, depend on the type of water quality perturbation

          pasting at the site.
                Improving sewage treatment and wastes released into the estuary would

          lessen the amount of introduced nutrients, this reducing the process of

              eutrophi cati on.   To induce better circulation  in areas where circulation

          has been moderated or terminated, one-way tidegates, cuts, and/or culverts

          can be installed.   Treatment of point and non-point sources of pollution,

          especially stormwater run-off, would decrease the amount of chemicals and

          toxins that are released  into the estuary.   These ideas represent only a

             few  options  that  exist  to  improve  water  quality  of  damaged  estuaries.

                         6
<pb n="72" />

68                               I
<pb n="73" />

II

*          Linking Juvenile  Fish to Estuaries

U

I11111    iith   IAIIL       II III·k IA r
<pb n="74" />

V. LINKING JUVENILE FISHERIES SPECIES TO ESTUARIES

V A.  SPECIES FOUND IN ESTUARIES

    Many investigators  have produced  rather  extensive juvenile species

lists for estuarine environments  in Florida alone.   Among them are Reid

(1954) and Kilby (1955) who listed species from Cedar Key; Harrington and

Harrington (1961) who recorded species from Indian River; Tabb and Manning

(1961) who listed species of Florida Bay; Springer and Woodburn (1960) and

Sykes  and Finucane (1966) who listed fishes of Tampa Bay;  and Odum and

Heald (1972) who recorded species from North River estuary.

    While  species  lists  represent  single  point-in-time  presence  of

juvenile fish in estuaries, studies of age and growth can document longer-

term presence.   An example of this concept is a two year age and growth

project currently underway by DNR Bureau of Marine Research.  The project

involves bimonthly collections of juvenile trout, drum, and related species

from various sites in the Tampa Bay estuary.  Sites include seagrass beds,

sandy bottoms, and back water sites with generally turbid water and muddy

bottoms.   Collections  at these  sites  have yielded  progressively  larger

juvenile fish of the same species, indicating that these fish live and grow

within the estuarine system.  In addition, this study will document growth

rates, site preference, and arrival time of new post-larvae that indirectly

indicates spawning times of adults.

     Table  4  lists  the  recreational  and  commercial  fishes  of Florida.

Robins et al. (1980) provided the scientific and common names. Commercial

species are defined as those recorded in Florida Landings (Florida

                                   69
<pb n="75" />

                     Table 4. FLORIDA RECREATIONAL AND COMMERCIAL SPECIES

                                                         ESTUARINE-j RECREATIONAL   COMMERCIAL
     FAMILY/SPECIES                                       DEPENDENT   EAST   WEST   EAST   WEST
Carcharhinidae - requiem sharks
     (Carcharhinus spp.)                                     +        X       X      X      X

Sphyrnidae - hammerhead sharks
     Hammerheads, bonnethead (Sphyrna spp.)                  +         X      X      X       X

Acipenseridae - sturgeons
     Atlantic sturgeon (Acipenser o. oxyrhynchus)                      X             X
     Gulf sturgeon (Acipenser oxyrhynchus desotoi)                            X              X
     Shortnose sturgeon (Acipenser brevirostrum)                       X             X

Albulidae - bonefishes
     Bonefish (Albula vulpes)                                +         X      X

Elopidae - tarpons
     Ladyfish, Tenpounder (Elops saurus)                     +         X      X
     Tarpon (Megalops atlantica-)a                           +         X      X

Clupeidae - herrings
     Alabama shad (Alosa alabamae)                           +                               X
     Alewife (Alosa pseudoharengus)                          +                       X       X
     American shad (Alosa sapidissima)                       +                       X       X
     Atlantic thread herring (Opisthonema oglinum)           -                X
     Atlantic menhaden (Brevoortia tyrannus)                 +                       X
     Gulf menhaden (Brevoortia patronus)                     +                              X
     Spanish sardines (Sardinella aurita)                                            X       X

Ariidea - sea catfishes
     Gafftopsail catfish (Bagre marinus)                     +         X      X      X       X
     Sea catfish (Arius fel6s)-                              +         X      X      X       X

Exocoetidae - flying fishes
     Ballyhoo (Hemiramphus brasiliensis)                                             X       X

Carangidae - jacks and pompanos
     Blue runner (Caranx crysos)                             +         X      X      X       X
     Cigarfish, scad (Decapterus spp.)                                               X       X
     Crevalle jack (Caranx hippos)                           +         X      X      X       X
     Florida pompano (Trachinotus carolinus)                 +         X      X      X       X
     Greater amberjack (Seriola dumerili)                    -         X      X      X       X
     Permit (Trachinotus falcatus)                           +        X       X      X       X

Centropomidae - snooks
     Snook (Centropomus pectinatus)                          +         X      X

Coryphaenidae - dolphins
     Dolphin (Coryphaena hippurus)                                     X x    X      X       X

                                                 70
<pb n="76" />

                   Table 4. FLORIDA RECREATIONAL AND COMMERCIAL SPECIES (Continued)

                                                            IESIUARINE-I RECREATIONALI COMMERCIAL
         FAMILY/SPECIES                                    DEPENDENT   EAST   WEST   EAST   WEST
   Ephippidae - spadefishes
        Atlantic spadefish (Chaetodipterus faber)             +         X      X

   Gerreidae - mojarras
         Spotfin mojarra (Eucinostomus argentus)               +         X      X      X      X
        Striped mojarra (Diapterus plumieri)                   +        X      X
         Yellowfin mojarra-,-sa-nd-per-ch-,-go-atfish
                              (Gerres cinereus)X                                              X
        Silver jenny (Eucinosou   ua                          +         X      X      X      X

   Haemulidae - grunts
         Pigfish (Orthopristis chrysoptera)                    +         X      X      X      X
         Tomtate (Haemulon aurolineatum)                       +         X      X
        White grunt (Haemulon plumieri)+X                                      X      X      X

I  Istiophoridae - billfishes
         Blue marlin (Makaira nigricans)                       -        X       X      X      X
         Sailfish (Istio-phorus platypterus)                   -        X       X
         White marlin (letrapturus  lbidT u)                   -         X      x      x      x

   Labridae - wrasses
         Hogfish (Lachnolaimus maximus)                                                X x    X

I  Lobotidae -trpeal
         Tripletail (Lobotes surinamensis)                     +         X      X      X      X

E  Lutjanidae - Snappers
         Cubera snapper (Lutjanus cyanopterus)                 +         X      x      x      x
         Lane snapper (Lutjanus synagris)                      +         X      X      X      X
        Mangrove (Gray)  npe7Ltau  griseus)                   +         X      X      X      X
        Mutton snapper (Lutjanus analis)                      +         X      X      X      X
         Red snapper (Lutjanus campechanus)                    +         X      x      X      X
         Vermillion snapper (RiomboplTTe-saurorubens)          -        X       X      X      X
         Yellowtail snapper (Ocyurus chrys u-rus)-y  X                          X      X      X
   Mal acanthi dae - til1efi shes
3         Ti lefish (Lopholatilus chamaeleonticeps)                                    X      X

   Mugilidae - mullets
         Black mullet (Mugil cephalus)                         +         x      x      x      x
         Fantail mullet (Mugil trichodon)                      +                       X      X
         Silver, white muTT-ef(7u-g- I curema)                 +                       X      x

I  Percichthyidae - temperate basses
         Striped bass (Morone saxatilis)                       +        X       X

I  Pomacanthidae - angelfishes
         Angelfish (H-olacanthus or Pomacanthus spp.)                                  X      X

          *                                                       71
<pb n="77" />

               Table 4.  FLORIDA RECREATIONAL AND COMMERCIAL SPECIES (Continued)3

                                                        IESTUARINE-1 RECREATIONAL I COMMERCIALj I
     FAMILY/SPECIES                                      IDEPENDENT I EAST   WEST I EAST   WEST
Pomatomidae - bluefishes
     Bluefish (Pomatomus saltatrix)                           +        X       X      X      X3

Rachycentridae - cobi asI
     Cobia (Rachycentron canadum)                                      x       x      x       x

Sciaenidae - drums
     Atlantic croaker (Micropogon undulatus)                  +        X       X      X       X
     Black drum (Pagna   rms                                  +        X       X      X       X
     Grey seatrouFi§inrgls                                    +        X              XI
     King whitingsotenkgfh (Menti ci rrhus
                                       americanus)           +        X       X      X      X
     Red drum (Sciaenops ocellatus)                      I   +         X              X       X
     Sand seatro-ut (Cyno scion arenarius)                    +        x          x           x
     Silver perch (Bairdiella chrysura)                       +        X       X
     Spot (Leiostomus xanthuru sT7                            +        x       x      x       xI
     Spotted seatrout (Cy nosci on nebulosus)                 +        X       X      X      X
     White, silver seatrout  Cynosc-ion n'othus)-X                             X      X       X

Scombridae - mackerels and tunasI
     Bigeye tuna (Thunnus obesus)                             -x               x
     Blackfin tuna (Thunnus atlanticus)                       -X               X
     Bluefin tuna (Thu nnus-thynnus)IIIII
     Little tunny (Euthynnus alletteratus)                             x X           X     X
     Skipjack tuna (Luthynnus pelarnis)                       -        X       X      X      X
     Frigate mackerel-T(Auxi s th-azar-d)                     -        X       X      X      X
     Ki ng mac kerelI ( Sco mberomo-ru-sc cava]lla)           +        X       X      X       X
     Spanish mackerel (Scomberomorus maculatus)               +        X   I          X      X

Serranidae - sea bassesI                                                           I       II I
     Bank sea bass (Centropristis ocyurus)                                  1 X I          Ix
     Black sea bass (Centropri sti s stri ata)-X                               X      X
     Gag grouper (Mycteroperca micr-o7e p-1s7                 +X               X      XX   I  I
     Jewfish (Epinephelus itajara)                            +        X       X      X      X
     Red grouper (Epi nephelus mono )                         +        X       X      X       X
     Rock sea bass (Centropr-is-t-i-s--piladelphica)          +        X       X
     Southern sea bass (Centropristis melana)                          x       x
     Warsaw (Epinephelus nigritus)                            -        X       X      X      X

Jparidae - porgiesI
     Pinfish (Lagodon rhomboides)                             +        X       X
     Scup (Stenotomus chrysops)                                                       X x    X
     Sheepshead (Archosarqus probatocephalus)                 +        X       X      X      X
     White snapper, porgy (Calamus spp.)                               X       X      X x     X

                                                 72
<pb n="78" />

               Table 4. FLORIDA RECREATIONAL AND COMMERCIAL SPECIES (Continued)

                                                        IESTUARINE-I RECREATIONALI COMMERCIAL
     FAMILY/SPECIES                                      DEPENDENT   EAST   WEST   EAST   WEST
Sphyraenidae - barracudas
     Great barracuda (Sphyraena barracuda)                   +         X      X      X       X
     Guaguanche (Sphyraena guaguancho)                       +         X      X      X       X

Xiphiidae - swordfishes
     Swordfish (Xiphias gladius)                                       X      X      X       X

Bothidae - lefteye flounders
     Gulf flounder (Paralichthys albigutta)                  +                X              X
     Southern flounder (Paralichthys lethostigma)            +         X      X      X       X
     Summer flounder (Paralichthys dentatus)                 +         X             X

Balistidae - leatherjackets
     Triggerfish (Balistes capriscus)                        +         X      X      X       X

Tetraodontidae - puffers
     Southern puffer (Sphoeroides nephelus)                  +         X      X

CRUSTACEANS, SPONGES, AND MOLLUSKS

Spongiidae - sponges
     Glove sponge (Spongia spp.)                             +                       X       X
     Grass sponge (Spongia graminea)                         +                       X       X
     Sheepswool sponge (Hippiospongia lachne)                +                       X       X
     Yellow sponge (Spongia zimocca)                         +                       X       X

Loliginidae: Squid (Loligo plei)                             -                       X       X

Strombidae: Conch (Strombus gigas)                           +         X      X      X       X

Ostreidae: Oyster (Crassostrea virginica)                    +         X      X       X      X

Pectinidae: Scallops (Argopectin irradians)                  +         X      X      X       X

Veneridae: Clam (Mercenaria mercenaria)                      +         X      X      X       X

Penaeidae: Brown shrimp (Penaeus aztecus)                    +         X      X      X       X
           Pink shrimp (Penaeus duorarum)                    +        x       X      X      X
           White shrimp (Penaeus setiferus)                  +        X       X      X      X

Sicyoniidae: Rock shrimp (Sicyonia brevirostris)             +         X      X      X       X

Palinuridae: Spiny lobster (Panulirus argus)                 +         X      X      X       X

Portunidae: Blue crab (Callinectes sapidus)                  +         X      X      X       X

Xanthidae: Stone crab (Menippe mercenaria)                   +         X      X      X       X

                                                 73
<pb n="79" />

Department of Natural Resources,  1978).  Considering that certain species

may or may not be regarded as recreational, dependi ng on the fi sherman,

recreational species are here defined as any fish caught and kept byI

saltwater anglers, all fish currently listed as a Florida record catch (a

co-sponsored DNR/IGFA project in developmental stages), and all species

pursued  by  sports  fishermen.    Species  designated  as  non-food  fishes

(typically bait fish) are included only as commercial species. Of 108 total

species, 89 are caught commercially (85 on the east coast, 83 on the west

coast), and 88 represent the recreational catch (84 on the east coast, 83

on  the  west  coast).I

    Table 4 also indicates which species reside in estuaries during someI

time in their  lives.   This information  is based on literature citations

that indicate the presence within an estuary of any sub-adult stage of the

species listed.  71.9% (n=64) of the commercial species and 73.9% (n=65) of

the recreational species dwell in estuaries at least as pre-adults.  Of theI

total commercial and recreational species, 68.5% (n=74) use estuaries as

nursery grounds.    These amounts are significant, especially considering

the  importance  of  fishing  industries  in  Florida.        Adding  to  this

information  is  the  report  by McHugh  (1976) who  estimated,  using  1970

statistics,  that  98%  by weight  of  all  Gulf  of  Mexico  landings  areI

estuari ne-dependent.

     Unfortunately, the simple presence of young stages within an estuary

is not enough proof of the use of estuaries as nursery grounds.   A link

must be established.   Several  methods exist to define this link.  Direct

evidence can be attained by diet analyses and feeding studies.   Indirect

                                  741
<pb n="80" />

evidence  is  provided  by  stable  isotope  analyses,  correlations  between

fisheries  yield  and  habitat  type,  and correlations  between  declines  in

fisheries  yield  and  wetlands, destruction.

V B. DIET ANALYSES

    Many researchers have examined gut contents to determine diet.  Table

5 lists  some recreational  and commercial  juvenile estuarine fishes  along

with items found in their digestive tracts.  An attempt was made to include

only fishes reported as less than or equal to 100mm in length, regardless

of species, to insure juvenile age class.   Food items found most commonly

(composing  over  50%  of  the  gut  content)  are  underlined.

     Three obvious conclusions can be drawn from the table: (1) juvenile

fish utilize several food sources, (2) differing species share common food

sources,  and (3) diets change as fish grow.   These conclusions emphasize

four (#1, #3, #4 and #5) of Miller and Dunn's (1980) features of juvenile

fish  feeding  relationships  as  discussed  in  the  previous  section.

     The most common food items found in digestive tracts of the majority

of species are copepods, shrimp, mysids, amphipods, fish, and polychaetes.

A subsequent  food chain  study would require  a diet  analysis  of each  of

these  animal  groups.    However,  within  each  group,  no  single  feedinq

strategy exists, especially for those groups occupying the sub-tropical

shoreline waters of Florida.   Within  the polychaete  group,  for example,

omnivores, herbivores, deposit feeders, carnivores, and detritivores are

found, each consuming a wide variety of food items.  Diet studies of these

groups are feasible and certainly important, but must be very specific.

                                   75
<pb n="81" />

   Table 5.   DIET ANALYSES OF SOME PRE-ADULT RECREATIONAL AND COMMERCIAL
               ESTUARINE FISH

        Species             Size (mm)    Code for Food1                 Reference2

Ladyfish                      19-38'    120,132                             106

Atlantic thread herring       21-40       230                                14
                              Juvenile    300                                  6
                                &gt;40        120,140,131,230                   14

Sea catfish                   small       620,160,100                        90

Crevalle jack                   79        600                                61

Permit                        15-20       140,135                            14
                               15-44       160,420,221                        38
                               26-35       610                                14
                                &gt;35        900                               14
                               50-100      180,200                            38

Silver jenny                  11-15       120                                14
                               16-39       120,911                            14
                               19-70       160,120,400                      102
                                &gt;35       911                                 14

 Striped mojarra               35-172      140,160,410                       106

Pigfish                       12-15       120,110,210                        60
                               16-20      T2U                                 14
                               21-30       120,135 and/or 140,630             14
                               31-40      T357 and/or 140,911,120             14
                               40-100      160,135,133,200,911               60
                               41-55       911,135 and/or 140,160,120,630  14
                               56-80      T,911,134,630,210,120               14

White grunt                   21-35       120,140 or 135,500                 14
                               36-40      TT4 or 135,120                     14

 Black mullet                 Juvenile    500,510                             61

 Atlantic croaker              10-39       911,400,160,120                   130
                               10-49       O-T,700,500,510                   61
                               17-42      200,110,120,911,600               156
                                &lt;39        120,100                          133
                               40-49       121,120,141,100                   133
                               40-89       TT1,400,160,120,500,140,135       130
                               50-59       100,141,120                      133
                               50-124      510,500,300,700,600                61
                               60-79       121,141,120,100                   133
                               80-99       120,100,911,141                   133

1Code list located on page
2Numbers refer to references listed in Section X.

                                         76
<pb n="82" />

   Table 5. DIET ANALYSES OF SOME PRE-ADULT RECREATIONAL AND COMMERCIAL
             ESTUARINE FISH (continued)

       Species             Size (mm)    Code for Food                 Reference

Grey seatrout                 30-49      121,100,141                       133
                             50-99      141,911,100                       133

Red drum                       0-19       120,140                            4
                             20-39      140,120,160                         4
                             40-49      T6O,140,600                         4
                             50-69      60,160,911                          4
                             70-99     176, 911,133,600,511,512

Sand seatrout                 10-39      140,120,135,600                   130
                             40-99      6TU,140,135,300                 61,130

Silver perch                   6-30      120,630,600,135 or 140,160,  14,60,90,
                                          n1l =I70,140,911               106
                             23-63      130,140,410,160,610                90
                             25-50      140,135,133                        60
                             25-99       135,120,160,200,911,600,100    122
                             30-39     1T2T -i                           133
                             31-35      120,135 and/or 140                 14
                             36-70      T37,120,160,100                    14
                             40-69      T1T,121,100                       133
                             50-80      140,135,161,911                   60
                             60-82      140                               156
                             70-99      141,100                          133
                             Larval     120,630                           102

Spot                           &lt;25       120,110                           60
                        Post-larval      120                               70
                             15-100     500,200,910,100                   60
                             20-69      911,500,120,920,140,220,400    130
                             40-99      700,500,510                        61
                             50-99      120,121                           133

Spotted seatrout             20-100      120,140,138                        97
                             20-130     600,135 and/or 140,120,160         14
                             25-150      140,137                          133
                             40-99      600,300,700,800,500,510            61
                             68-122      14-,160,410,138,610              102

Pinfish                       10-30      120,160,135 and/or 140,1100,
                                          -11,100                          14
                             15-50      135,160,120                       122
                             31-65      160,1100,911,135 and/or 140        14
                             39-61      222,140,160,223                   106
                             40-99      700,500,800,600                    61
                             51-100     120,135,510,160,200,133,600,   122
                                           1400
                             66-90       135 and/or 140,1100,600,500       14
                              &lt;76       1200,100,911,2000                  53
                        Post-larval      120                               70

                                       77
<pb n="83" />

   Table 5. DIET ANALYSES OF SOME PRE-ADULT RECREATIONAL AND COMMERCIAL
             tL5UAKINL Il5H (continued)

       Species             Size (mm)    Code for Food                 Reference

Sheepshead                     &lt;40       120,160,410,140,1300,200          106

Southern puffer               6-25       500,300,911,210,133,135            14

                                       78
<pb n="84" />

                               DIET CODE LIST

100   Crustaceans
      110 Ostracods
       120 Copepods
           121 Pseudodiaptomus coronatus
       130 Decapods
           131 Megalops larvae
           132 Crab zooae
           133 Crabs
           134 Xanthid crabs
           135 Shrimp
           136 Post larval shrimp
           137 Penaeid shrimp
           138 Cariddean shrimp
       140 Mysids
           141 Neomysis americana
       150 Isopods
       160 Amphipods
           161 Gammarid amphipods
       170 Cladocereans
       180 Larger crustaceans
200   Mollusks
       210 Gastropods
       220 Bivalves
           221 Donax variabilis
           222 Brachidontes exustus
           223 Congeria leucophaeta (now called Mytilopsis leucophaeta)
           230 Veliger larvae
300   Zooplankton
400   Insect larvae
       410 Chironomids
       420 Larval and adult Dipteran insects
500   Detritus
       510 Organic matter
           511 Animal remains                  300  Zooplankton: mostly cope-
           512 Fecal pellets                               pods, mysids, larval
600   Fish                                                penaeid shrimp
       610 Small fish                          700  Micro-invertebrates: small
       620 Fish eggs                                       bivalves, isopods,
       630 Fish larvae                                     amphipods, small
 700   Micro-invertebrates                                 crabs, chironomid
800   Larger invertebrates                                 larvae
900   Benthic invertebrates                    800  Larger invertebrates: mud
       910 Annelids                                        crabs, blue crabs,
           911 Polychaetes                                 shrimp spp.
       920 Nematodes                           500  Detritus: decaying marsh
1000   Vegetation                                          grasses, phyto-
       1100 Epiphytes                                      plankton, zooplank-
       1200 Diatoms                                        ton, micro-benthic
       1300 Algae                                          animals
       1400 Plant debris
2000   Chordates

                                      79
<pb n="85" />

Since most sources of Table 5 reported food items as groups, i.e. copepods

and polychaetes, without knowing the exact species serving as food items,

no  conclusions  can  be  drawn.    However,  using  gut  analyses  to  link

seagrasses and mangroves to juvenile fishes has potential, although

available knowledge about different trophic levels and their food items

does not provide enough information to concretely link juvenile species to

primary producers.

V C. STABLE ISOTOPE ANALYSES

     Carbon, the element upon which all life is based, occurs on Earth in

three isotopic forms (12C, 13C, and 14C), and all prove useful in

scientific investigations.   Radioactive 14C, due to its inherent instabil-

ity and, therefore, its rate of decay, provides an extremely valuable tool

for  dating  fossils.

     12C and 13C occur as stable isotopes.  Because the two isotopes react

at different rates during photosynthesis, every primary producer embodies a

certain ratio of the two isotopes, specific to the plant or plant group.

The ratio, known as the relative 13C content (613C ), is determined by the

equati on                         12  1
                             C/ C sample   - 1)   3
                                 C standard

in which the standard refers to the PDB marine carbonate standard (Craig,

1953). 613C is typically measured in parts per million (0/00).

Because the standard has a higher ratio than almost all other carbon-based

materials, most materials have negative values.   C3 plants  (those  that

                                   8O
<pb n="86" />

convert carbon dioxide to a 3-carbon molecule) possess 613C values between

about  -21  and  -340/oo  (Wong  and  Sacket  1978; Sacket, in press).   C4

plants (those that convert carbon dioxide to a 4-carbon compound) maintain

values  of  approximately  -6  to  -19°/oo  (Smith  and  Epstein  1971).

    An interesting fact about 613C is that the ratio is maintained through

the food chain. In other words, whereas primary producers fix 13C/12C into

their biomass through photosynthesis, secondary consumers maintain the

ratios of plants they eat.   Subsequently, tertiary consumers maintain the

ratio of their prey. The theory for the estuarine system follows that pre-

adult fishes, existing as top carnivores (irrespective of larger fish and

birds), should maintain 613C values identical to seagrasses and mangroves,

if these two primary producers do indeed serve as important food sources

for the estuarine system.  Although the first measurements of 13C were made

in 1939 (Nier and Gulbransen 1939), the concept of ratio maintenance

through the food chain is relatively new, and very little work has been

done to date in this realm of research.  A significant point is that 613C

is a function of an animal's history - it provides data of feeding

behaviors over time, averaging out seasonality and food availability.   In

comparison, gut analyses provides data for only a single point in time.

    Haines  and Montague  (1979) recognized two significant  criteria for

using 13C/12C ratios to analyze food chains:   (1) definite ratios must

exist for food sources alternate to those under investigation, and (2) the

ratio must be maintained  through the food chain.   Fry and Parker  (1979)

noted that  previous  studies  have indicated  that  animals possess  a   13C

value very near the value of their diets, however, metabolism may affect

the value + 2% between individuals or species (Minson et al. 1975; DeNiro

                                  81
<pb n="87" />

and Epstein 1978).

    No 613C studies for Lake Worth or Charlotte Harbor have been reported;

however, Fry and Parker (1979)and Fry et al. (1977) investigated the Upper

Laguna Madre seagrass ecosystem in Texas.   The dominant  seagrass  at the

site was Halodule wrightii with smaller areas of Thalassia testudinum and

Halophila  engelmanni.    By  comparing  613C  values  of fish,  shrimp,  and

invertebrates of the seagrass system to the same species offshore, they

found that benthic plants heavily influenced the carbon flow.  Results from

another study by Fry et al. (1982) of a Caribbean seagrass bed and coral

reef suggested that benthic plants contribute 48-76% of the carbon in fish

generally greater than 40mm in length.   Thayer et al. (unpublished) found

that deposit feeders and herbivorous invertebrates living on eelgrass

blades near Beaufort, N.C. obtained about 60% of their carbon from

seagrasses.   In the  same study,  seagrasses  provided  omnivorous  inverte-

brates  and  fishes  45%  of  their  carbon.

     Nitrogen and sulfur also are used as tracers in food web studies.

Both elements have two major stable isotopes:   15N and 14N, and 32S and

34S.    Joseph Zieman  (Department  of Environmental  Science,  University of

Virginia, Charlottesville, VA) is currently analyzing juvenile shrimp of

south Florida estuaries  using carbon, nitrogen,  and sulphur.   Other than

this  study,  little  work  has  been  done  using tracer  methods  in Florida

estuaries, however, the papers reported here certainly support the use of

these methods as an effective tool  in tracing estuarine food webs.   Such

tracer studies could determine the significance of different vegetation

components within major estuarine systems, e.g. Charlotte Harbor and Tampa

Bay.    These  studies  could  partition  out  the  contributions  of manqrove

                                   82
<pb n="88" />

detritus, seagrasses, and phytoplankton in disturbed versus relatively

undisturbed systems.

V D. CORRELATIONS BETWEEN FISHERIES YIELD AND HABITAT TYPE

    Amounts of emergent and submergent vegetation and freshwater flow have

been  associated  statistically with  fisheries  yield  in some areas.   For

example, Turner (1977) related shrimp yield to acreage of marsh and sub-

merged grassbeds as did Barrett and Gillespie (1973) who demonstrated a

positive correlation between brown shrimp landings in Louisiana and marsh

acreage with  salinities  above  100/oo.   More recently,  Zimmerman  et al.

(1984) showed that juvenile brown shrimp in Texas were more abundant in

salt marsh areas than in nonvegetated areas.

    The association between faunal abundance and marine vegetation is not

limited to shrimp.   Macalaster (1982) showed that fish were more diverse

and abundant at vegetated sites than nonvegetated sites in the Chesapeake

Bay and that a decline in submerged grasses affected fisheries yield.

Weinstein and Brooks (1983) determined fish species and abundance differ-

ences between a tidal creek and an adjacent seagrass bed and although both

areas harbored wide ranging species, the seagrass area had hiqher diver-

sity. As Weinstein and Brooks pointed out, the specifics of habitat selec-

tion and utilization are not well documented, yet we accept the theory of

estuaries  as  nursery  ground  habitat  based  on  occurrence,  distribution,

abundance, and gut contents of those fisheries species studied.

     Yokel (1975) reported that crustacean  abundance was 3.9 times larger

within seagrass beds and algal mats than on nearby unvegetated bottoms.

                                   83
<pb n="89" />

Densities of fishes in south Florida estuaries and lagoons were found

generally higher within grass beds as opposed to adjacent non-vegetated

habitats  (cf. Zieman 1982; Figure 5).

     In  addition  to  these  reports,  other  studies  have  shown  that  in

Thalassia beds, areas of greater plant biomass contained both a higher

diversity and a greater abundance of epibenthic invertebrates than areas of

lesser biomass (Heck and Orth 1980).  An extremely important point is that

the presence of seagrasses is critical to the presence of many other plant

and  animal  species  living  within  the  system.    In other  words,  if  all

seagrass blades were removed, much of the epibenthic faunal community would

probably vanish  as well.   Zieman  (1982) notes that "there are few other

systems which are so dominated and controlled by a sinqle species...".  In

summary, areas containing seagrasses are inhabited by a greater abundance

                                                Fish

        w' 75                                                         Invertebrates

        z 50-

        I-.

                     HEAVY         THIN          SAND,         MUD,
                   SEAGRASS   SEAGRASS           SHELL         SAND,
                 Halodule 8 Thalassia  Halodule                SHELL

        Figure 5. Relative abundance of some faunal communities within
                   seagrass beds and within adjacent non-vegetated sites.
                   (Redrawn from Zieman 1982, after Yokel 1975).

                                    84
<pb n="90" />

            of organisms than unvegetated sites, and abundance appears to be directly

             related  to  seagrass  density.

              V E.  CORRELATIONS BETWEEN DECLINES IN FISHERIES YIELD AND WETLANDS

                  DESTRUCTION

                 Since the literature well-documents the importance of estuaries as

              nursery grounds,  it is obvious  that  as estuarine  habitat  disappears,  a

 3             decline  in associated  fisheries  also should occur.   Lindall  and Saloman

            (1977) warned that "man's physical and chemical alterations of gulf

 *            estuaries  are  threatening  the  continued  production  of  its  fisheries

            resources."    However,  they  could  not  quantify  the  impact.

  3                  Two  methods  exist  to  quantify  the  relationship  between  fisheries

            habitat  alteration  and associated  fisheries  decline.   One method  is to

               determine carry capacities of the various habitats.   In theory, carrying

 *             capacity would  describe the  amount of fisheries  species  and individuals

            that an area of habi tat can support. As fi sheri es habi tat is altered or

            destroyed,  the quantity of fisheries  it supports  can be predicted to be

            destroyed  as well.    In practice,  however,  ways  to  determine  carrying

.1             capacity *are  basically  unknown  and  are  under  investigation.

                 A second method i s to relate catch statistics of estuarine-dependent

            species to declines in estuarine habitat over a period of time.  Assuming

 3             that catch effort has remained stable, that catch efforts occur at habitat

            carrying capacity, and that all life history stages of a species is known,

 3             this method should reflect a change in fisheries relative to changes and

            alterations  in habitat.   To test  this  theory,  five estuarine-dependent

                                                                85
<pb n="91" />

species  were  chosen  as target  groups:  red drum  (Sciaenops  ocellatus),

spotted seatrout (Cynoscion nebulosus), black mullet (Mugil cephalus), blue

crab (Callinectes sapidus), and pink shrimp (Penaeus duorarum).  Fisheries

statistics, though improper and inadequate as will be described in Section

V E 2, of these five species were obtained  for the two  study sites,

Charlotte Harbor and Lake Worth.

V  E  i.    LIFE  HISTORY  STUDIES

    RED  DRUM  (Sciaenops  ocellatus)l

    Red drum spends its juvenile and early subadult stages within

estuaries.   Some adult populations  live exclusively in the Gulf while

others  live in estuaries.   Red drum's range extends from Buzzards Bay,

Massachusetts to Key West, Florida on the Atlantic Coast and throughout the

Gulf of Mexico to at least as far south as Taxpan, Mexico on the Gulf

Coast.

     Shrimp, crab and fish primarily comprise the diet of the adult red

drum.  The literature also reports annelids, echinoderms, and bryozoans as

food items; these probably are ingested only incidentally.   Florida red

drum  spawn  offshore  in  fall,  reportedly  near  passes  and  channels.

Fecundity estimates for artificially conditioned and spawned red drum are 2

x 104 to 2 x 106 eggs per spawn.  Fecundity of wild fish from Texas ranges

from 0.5 x 106 to 3.5 x 106 eggs per fish.  Tidal currents carry larvae

through inlets and passes into estuarine areas where they settle out among

1Summarized from Perret et al. (1980)

                                   86
<pb n="92" />

           the aquatic vegetation until they are strong enough to swim. In Florida,

           the smallest larval fishes (5-7mm) were always found in shallow areas in or

              near the Gulf.  In Mississippi- abundant juvenile red drum are found at the

              perimeter of marshes.  In Florida, young fish are found in protected waters

           with  grassy  or  slightly muddy  bottoms  that  are  not  affected  by tides.

           Following spawning,  red drum appear to spend more time in offshore waters

           and less time in estuaries.

                    Growth of the small fishes is rapid, and continues to be rapid during

           the  first  year.    A  study  of  106  juveniles  collected  from  Everglades

           National  Park found growth  rates of about 20mm per month.   Results from

*             tagging studies in Florida indicated that growth is not constant throughout

           the year; fish exhibit a growth lag in spring, a rapid growth in summer and

           a slight lag at the end of summer.   Food density and larval stock density

           influence growth as demonstrated in studies in mariculture systems.

                    For their first winter, many red drum ranging from 50 to 150mm move to

3             the deeper areas of estuaries.   A gradual movement of fishes into the Gulf

           during colder weather and a definite movement back into the estuary in

              early spring occurs after the first year.  No apparent seasonal movement of
           juveniles into the Gulf is known.  As sub-adults, they move offshore prior

             to  maturation  and  spawning.

                Red drum are euryhaline and eurythermal.  Although they are found in

           salinities from 0 to 500/00, they appear to prefer an optimum range of
3             30-350/oo.    A direct  relationship  between  size  and  salinity  generally

           occurs with smaller fish prefering low salinities and larger fish favoring

3             higher salinities.  Red drum also have the ability to tolerate a wide range

           of temperature.   Although they are found in temperatures ranging from 2-

                                                               87
<pb n="93" />

31.8°C,  red  drum  are  sensitive  to  rapid  and  sustained  lows  in water

temperature.

     In Florida,  winter  produces  the greatest  availability of red drum,

whereas in Texas, Louisiana, and Mississippi, the greatest numbers occur in

fall.

     SPOTTED SEATROUT (Cynoscion nebulosus)l

    The spotted seatrout is a species that spends all of its life within

the estuary.   Primarily found in large areas of quiet brackish water with

extensive submerged vegetation, the species ranges from Cape Cod to Mexico.

Reflecting the mottled appearance of seagrasses, the spotted seatrout's

body is silvery with numerous dark spots on the sides and on the dorsal and

caudal fins.   The world record catch was a 7.3kg fish taken in Virginia;

Florida's state record is a 7kg fish.

     Feeding habits of the spotted seatrout change as the fish grows.

Postlarval seatrout feed on larval shrimp, copepods, small fish, and crabs.

They also prey on their own species.  Copepods, mysids, penaeid shrimp, and

carridean shrimp comprise the diet of juveniles.   Fish become an increas-

ingly important food item during the adult stage.  Adult diets most often

consist of black mullet (Mugil cephalus), anchovies (Anchoa spp), pinfish

(Lagoden  rhomboides),  mojarras  (Eucinostomus  sp.),  sheepshead  minnows

(Cyprinodon variegatos), and penaeid shrimp (Penaeus sp.). It appears that

any preference for food items is more a function of food availability than

1Summarized from Lorio and Perret (1980)

                                   88
<pb n="94" />

of selectivity.   This theory is exemplified by studies that found that

shrimp and fish were equally present in gut contents during May, June, and

July, when shrimp are most abundant in the area.

    The spawning season of spotted seatrout in the Gulf is generally from

February through October.   In Florida, spawning occurs from April through

September, peaking in late May/early June.   Ripe fish occur all year in

Florida Bay, the southern  limit of the species range, with a major peak

occurring in May and a lesser peak in September.  Spawning takes place at

night and is believed to occur in the deeper channels and holes adjacent to

grassy bays and flats.   Some spawning may also take place in the tidal

portions of estuaries and also outside the estuary.   Fecundity estimates

range from 15,000 to 150,000 eggs per spawn.

     Larval spotted seatrout grow from 1.5mm at hatching to about 4.5mm in

15 days.   Rapid growth continues  to about  13cm by the first winter and

about 24cm by the second winter.   Growth lessens or ceases during winter

due  probably to decreased metabolism and cessation of feeding activities

at lower temperatures.   The most rapid growth occurs in July and August.

Longevity for spotted seatrout appears to be about 8 or 9 years.

     Growth rates are density dependent, and may vary from one population

to another.   Growth of spotted seatrout in five different estuaries along

the Florida coast occurred at different rates. Because seatrout popula-

tions from given estuaries exhibit differing growth characteristics, each

estuary and its population of spotted seatrout should be considered as a

separate stock.

     Spotted  seatrout  are not  considered  a migratory species  since they

seldom move more than 48.3km from their tagging site and very few leaving

                                   89
<pb n="95" />

their  natal  estuary.    Movement  patterns  appear  to  be  associated  with

temperature, avoidance of fresh water, spawning, feeding, and protection.

    Winter habitat throughout- the species' range extends farther offshore

and at greater depths.   Optimum temperatures  in Florida are 15 to 27°C.

Temperatures below 7 to 9°C force spotted seatrout to enter ocean inlets or

live offshore along the beach area for brief periods of time.   However,

just as they move to deeper water to escape cold water, seatrout also

travel to deeper water to escape intolerable warm water.

     Spotted seatrout is a euryhaline species sometimes found in fresh-

water  and in hypersaline water  of 750/o0.   Normal  salinity fluctuation

of  5 to  300/0o is  important  to  all  productive  seatrout  populations,

however, sudden changes in salinity may cause mass migration or mortali-

ties.   Peak  spawning  occurs  at 30 to 350/oo, but no spawning has been

reported to take place when salinity exceeded 450/00.

     Spotted  seatrout  are found  along their  range within  clear to very

turbid waters.   The only documented negative effect of turbidity occurred

in Florida Bay following Hurricane Donna when turbulent water stirred up

the  sandy  bottom  causing  packing  of  the  fishes'  gill  chambers  and

mortality.   Within  the  food  web  of the  estuary,  the  spotted  seatrout

represents  a top carnivore,  in fact in many estuaries the only carnivore

present  in  numbers.    All  other  aquatic  orqanisms,  either  directly  or

indirectly, can serve as food.  Because of this, the general health of the

estuary  must  be  maintained  to  insure  healthy  populations  of  spotted

seatrout.

                                   90
<pb n="96" />

    BLACK MULLET (Mugil cephalus)1

    Black mullet represents a species that spends most of its life within

the estuary except during times of seasonal migration, annual spawning, and

during very young stages.  Also known as striped mullet, black mullet are

found throughout in coastal waters and estuaries the tropics and

subtropics.

    Adult and juvenile black mullet feed diurnally in bays and estuaries

during high tide.   Mullet feed by sucking  up surface  layers of muddy

bottoms or by grazing on seagrasses, rocks, or other surfaces.  Diatoms,

dinoflagellates, copepods, plant detritus (especially attached microflora),

and inorganic sediments commonly comprise their diet.  When present, non-

toxic plankton provides the exclusive diet.   Larvae and small juveniles

(2-35mm) feed on zooplankton.

1Summarized from Saltwater Fisheries Study and Advisory Council (1981) and

 Futch (1976).

                                   91
<pb n="97" />

     Spawning takes place in Florida from October through February, peaking

from  November  through  January.    Prior  to  spawning,  mullet  form  large

schools and migrate from the estuary to offshore waters.   Along the east

coast of Florida,  spawning migrations move southward.   The only distinct

migration pattern reported for the west coast occurs from Cedar Key to

Homosassa.   Spawning usually occurs from 8 to 32km offshore in the Gulf of

Mexico.

     Females  produce  from  1.2  - 2.7 million  eggs  in  a single  spawn,

releasing them directly into the water.  Accompanying males fertilize the

floating, planktonic eggs.  Depending on water temperature, hatching occurs

30 - 50 hours after fertilization.   Hatched larvae measure 2 - 4mm, main-

taining an oceanic, planktonic existence for approximately 7 days.   During

this time, they grow to 20-30mm and migrate inshore, passing through inlets

into the grassy parts of estuaries.

     Growth rates directly correlate with water temperature and mullet from

Florida mature in 1-2 years, growing to a length of 230-350mm.    Black

mullet live to 6-7 years and grow to about 750mm.  Females typically live

longer and grow larger than males.

     BLUE CRAB (Callinectes sapidus)l

     The blue crab inhabits coasts from Nova Scotia to Argentina.   It is

1Summarized from Saltwater Fisheries Study and Advisory Council (1981)

and Oesterling (1976).

                                   92
<pb n="98" />

             found from shore to approximately 90 meters in depth., but principally up to

          35 meters.

                   The adult blue crab is characteristically omnivorous.   Live and dead

          fish, aquatic vegetation, clams, mussels, snails, amphipods, isopods,

          insects and annelid worms comprise the diet of the adult blue crab.  Food

j            selection of larval crabs remains relatively unknown,  however,  laboratory

          larvae have been raised successfully on dinoflagellates, brine shrimp, and

              sea urchin eggs.  Crabs at the megalops stage feed on fish, shellfish, and

          aquatic plants.  Mating and spawning in Florida occur year-round, except in

          northern Florida waters when the water temperatures drop below 15.6'C.

          Female blue crabs mate only once per lifetime, during the molt from

          juvenile to adult.   Prior to this transition, the female will move to less

          saline  brackish  waters,  of 8-l80/oo salinity.   She will  then pair with

          a male and will be carried, or cradled, underneath the male.  While in this

          cradled position, the female completes her final molt into the adult.  At

             this time, while in the soft inter-molt stage, copulation (lasting several

          hours) takes place.   The male transfers his sperm to the female, of which

          she stores in seminal receptacles within her body.  The sperm are able to

          live in this condition  for  about one year.   After copulation,  the male

             still cradles the female beneath him until her new shell hardens, then he

*             releases her.

               After mating, females migrate to nearshore high salinity waters

3             (&gt;250/o0)  at  the  mouths  of  estuaries  to  spawn.    Spawning  typically

          occurs I - 9 months subsequent to mating, with peak spawning in April and

           June.   Females spawn at least twice, each time laying 700,000 - 2 million

          eggs.   Classically,  females follow a general  latitudinal  onshore/offshore

                                                               93
<pb n="99" />

migration  pattern.   On Florida's  Gulf coast,  however,  a tagging  study

conducted by DNR Bureau of Marine Research found that females migrate

longitudinally, sometimes travelling over 640 km.

    Females carry their eggs for 7-14 days in the offshore waters until

they hatch  into  a zoea  larvae  stage.   Dependent  upon temperature  and

salinity,  the  seven  zoea  stages  develop  for  31-49  days,  leading  a

planktonic  existence.   The following megalops stage has both planktonic

and benthic features.  By utilizing tidal currents, the megalops enter the

estuary and molt into the first crab stage.   Grass beds and a variety of

shallow  water  areas  provide  habitats  for  growing  crabs.    Adult  size

(&gt;120mm)  is achieved within  12-14 months  and 18-20 molts.   Movement  to

deeper water occurs with increasing size.  After reaching adult size, crabs

live  about  one  more  year.

     PINK SHRIMP (Penaeus duorarum)l

     Pink shrimp range from lower Chesapeake Bay to south Florida on the

Atlantic coast, throughout the Gulf of Mexico, and on the Bermuda coast.

The greatest abundance of pink shrimp occurs along coastlines characterized

by shallow bays and estuaries and where the continental shelf is broad and

shallow. Optimum habitat varies with age; shallow, quiet, clear water with

seagrass growth is preferred by young shrimp while adults live in the

1Summarized from Costello and Allen (1970) unless otherwise noted.

                                   94
<pb n="100" />

deeper  offshore bottom areas with no seagrasses.

    Pink shrimp spawn offshore and year round. Females release fertilized

microscopic eggs into the water; the eggs then sink to the bottom.  After

hatching, the larvae are planktonic and are transported landward, apparent-

ly floating with currents. Three to five weeks are believed to pass before

the 8mm postlarvae enter the estuaries.  Mortality rates for shrimp larvae

are estimated as 17% per day; extremely few make it to the estuaries. Post-

larvae enter the south Florida estuaries throughout the year but are least

abundant during the winter.   When shrimp reach approximately  10mm, they

become  benthic, concentrating  within  shallow  seagrasses, and developino

into juveniles.  Densities may exceed 32 individuals per m2 within the sub-

sequent two to four months.   Shrimp grow rapidly,  reaching commercially

acceptable size within a few months.  As they grow and mature, most shrimp

gradually emigrate offshore into deeper, higher salinity water.   Size at

emigration  averages  90-100mm.   A few,  however,  remain  in the estuaries

after becoming adults. Eighty-three weeks is the estimated average maximum

age.

    Most shrimp that develop within the estuarine waters of southwestern

Florida  are  captured  either  in  the  Dry  Tortugas  or  Sanibel  shrimping

grounds.   However, most offshore waters adjacent to south Florida contain

maturing and adult pink shrimp,  sometimes in depths to 110 meters.   But

much of the bottom is too rough for conventional trawling gear; a rela-

tively smooth sandy bottom underlies the Sanbibel, Tortugas, and Hawk

Channel grounds where most large pink shrimp are taken commercially

(Costello and Allen 1966).

                                   95
<pb n="101" />

    Spawning and distribution of shrimp populations may be determined by

temperature and salinity.  On the Tortugas grounds, shrimp spawn in waters

of  19.6°-30.6°C,  with  highest  activity  coinciding  with  highest  bottom

temperatures.  A rising temperature may trigger spawning activity.

    Preference for various salinity regimes vary with shrimp size and

geographic  area.    Young  shrimp  can  survive  for  a short  time  at  low

salinities.  In the Florida Bay area, postlarvae were caught at salinities

from 12-43°/oo, juveniles at 0-470/oo, and adults at 25-

450/oo.     The  Tortugas  grounds,  have  salinities  of  36-380/oo.

    Water that is mostly turbid generally harbors the largest concentra-

tions of young shrimp per unit area.  Kutkuhn (1966) suggested that since

more detrital material is suspended, a greater food source and protective

cover is created.

     Juvenile  and  estuarine-dwelling  adult  pink  shrimp  are  omnivorous

bottom feeders, feeding primarily in shallow waters within seagrass beds.

Crustaceans and polychaetes comprise the main food source of juveniles in

south Florida, with no difference seasonally or with shrimp size.  Stomach

contents from juvenile and adult shrimp from Tampa Bay, Florida indicated

indiscriminate feeding behaviors; diets consisted of sand, debris, algae,

diatoms, seagrass particles, dinoflagellates, foraminiferans, nematodes,

polychates, ostracods, copepods, mysids, isopods, amphipods, caridean

shrimp, caridean eggs, mollusks, and fish scales.  Most feeding occurs at

night, though some takes place during daytime under turbid conditions.

                                   96
<pb n="102" />

           V E 2. FISHERIES STATISTICS

                    Catch data for the five selected species were obtained from the annual

           summaries of Florida Landings (Florida Department of Natural Resources,

           1950-1978).   National  Marine Fisheries  Service  (Southeast Center, Miami)

           provided information for 1979-1981 from their computer data base. All data

           include only commercial catch information.   Florida Landings lists commer-

              cial catch by county of landing (processing);  study sites are, therefore,

           defined by the counties surrounding them:

                          Charlotte Harbor =Charlotte and Lee Counties
     *                                   Lake Worth = Palm Beach County

               Catch data are graphically depicted in Figure 6 through Figure 14 for

           Charlotte  Harbor  and Figure  15 through  Figure 22 for Lake Worth.   Each

             figure  with  "LBS CATCH"  on the y-axis  shows  a straight  horizontal  line

           drawn through it; this line represents the 31-year average for that species

           for that study site.   Note, too, that the y-axis scale differs for each

           figure.   Since data for bait shrimp catch in Lake 'Worth are non-existent,

           Lake  Worth  has  no  figure  for  bait  shrimp.

                There are five major problems associated with commercial catch data.

           One of the most significant difficulties concerns the location where the

              catch was made as opposed to the location where it was landed. Lake Worth

           exemplifies this problem.   The use of commercial  nets except cast nets in

           Lake Worth was banned in 1931 (Special Acts, 1931, Chapter 8796) and banned

           in 1955 from any inlets and in waters surrounding the inlets of Palm Beach

           County  (Special  Acts,  1955, Chapter  31137).   However,  Palm Beach County

                                                                97
<pb n="103" />

continuously contributes catch data, albeit low amounts, for estuary-

dwelling species to the landings'  data base.   Illegal commercial  netting

supposedly occurs at night in Lake Worth;  this may account for some of the

reported landings, since landing the catch in Palm Beach County is not

illegal. Theoretically, however, unless caught legally by hook or cast net

or illegally by commercial nets, landed catch in Palm Beach was harvested

outside the county.   This problem of where the harvest was made is typical

throughout Florida's landing statistics.I

    The second significant problem, most critical  for this study, is the

absence of effort data. Catch per unit of effort would best reveal a riseI

or fall in catch rate for specific sites and species.  For example, Figure

8, depicting the spotted seatrout catch of Charlotte Harbor, indicates a

general upward slope in landed poundage.   Thi s increase may be due to the

presence of more seatrout or because of a rise in the number of fishermen.

Without effort data, increases and decreases in landed amounts remain un-

assessable.

    A third consideration is that landings data exclude recreationalI

fisheries which, for certain species, exceed commercial efforts. Red drum.

and spotted seatrout, for example, are caught extensively by recreational

fishermen.    This  concern  is  compounded  by  the  fact  that  effort  in

recreational fishing has significantly increased in conjunction with the

rise in Florida's population and tourist industry.I

    Fourth, si nce landings data are obtained from reports made by the

commercial dealers themselves, values are only as accurate as the dealers'

record; values are perhaps much higher.  In addition, some commercial catch

is not reported at all (e.g. live catch of blue crabs sold to restaurants.

                                  98I
<pb n="104" />

    Finally, landings data do not account for open and closed seasons or

local  laws.   For example,  bait shrimp has the potential  to serve as an

excellent indicator species of-estuarine health, since juvenile bait shrimp

grow  and  are  captured  within  an estuary.   However,  in  1976, Charlotte

County, for example, banned the use of more than 1 trawl net at a time and

the trawl net must be under 25' in length (Special Acts, 1976 Chapter 76-

343 as amended by Chapter 77-525).  In addition,  Lee County banned  the

practice of sweeping, dragging or hauling any nets except hand cast nets or

bait nets; bait nets must not exceed 100' in length, a depth greater than

6', nor a mesh size greater than 1 3/8" (Special Acts 1947, Chapter 23951,

as  amended  by Chapters  63-1560, 69-1236  and 69-1237).  These  laws must

certainly affect the distribution of landing statistics.   Another example

concerns the local laws of Palm Beach County as described in the second

paragraph of this section - commercial netting, except cast netting, is

banned altogether in Lake Worth.

     Existing problems in fisheries statistics can be resolved through

establishing a State program.  A memorandum of understanding with National

Marine Fisheries (NMFS) has been signed by DNR to access aggregate

commercial  landings.   A cooperataive   agreement  between NMFS and DNR is

under consideration that will allow individual data access and eventually

the acquisition of the commercial  statistics program.   Additionally,  DNR

has formulated a State marine fisheries statistics program that includes

both  commercial  and recreational  fisheries  statistics.   The program was

designed to collect effort, area of catch, species composition and weight,

gear type used, and biological data.  The acquisition of such data augments

historical data and will provide a more comprehensive data base necessary

                                   99
<pb n="105" />

for future management  strategies  and decisions.   Until  an improved  fish-

eries statistics program is established, the use of present Landings' data
for comparing between site catch values and even trends over time may prove
erroneous. However, because no other data exists, Landing's values remain

as the only available information.

                                            100
<pb n="106" />

                  700

                 500  i

                  400

                  300

                  200

                   900
                 IO 0  -

                     950 7955              960        965       1970       975        90

                  't40-
                         IY    &lt;   YEAR
               Figure 6.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for red drum
                            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area.  Horizontal  line

                            indicates the 31 year average.

                   IO0  -

                    '90    -

               o   80 -

                          70-
               0
                    195 60      1

                    10
                'J  30 -
                IL.

                          20.+.  -   +                                             -

                      1950      1955      1960       1965      1970       1975      1980

               Figure 7. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for red drum
                            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area over the amount
                            landed for the west coast of Florida.

                                                                  101
<pb n="107" />

   1500 --

   1400 -

   1300 --

   1200 -

   1100   -

o  900--

   800

o  700 -

   600 -

J  500

    300 -

    200 -

    100  :   :     ; :  :  *  :  :  :  :  :  :  :  :  :  -  I  I  I  ,  I ,  ,  ,
       1950      1955     1960      1965       1970      1975     1980
                                   YEAR

Figure 8. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for spotted seatrout
            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area. Horizontal line
            indicates the 31 year average.

    100 -

    90 -

  o 80 -

-  70 -

U60

 o  40 --

 U-  30
 0
  20 --

     10

       1950     1955      1960      1965      1970      1975      1980
                                   YEAR

Figure 9. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for spotted seatrout
            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area over the amount landed
            for the west coast of Florida.

                                  102
<pb n="108" />

12000 -

 I 1000    -

10000

 9000-

8000-

 7000  -XCZ)                                 &lt;

 6000

 5000

 4000

 3000 --

 2 000
      1950     1955       1960      1965      1970       1975      1980

                                    YEAR

Figure 10.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for black mullet
            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area.  Horizontal line
            indicates the 31 year average.

   100 -

    90-

    80 --
  so
  0
 70 7  -

o  60 -

  40
o
    50   --

    30

 LL
F'-

  o 0  --

      1950      1955      1960      1965      1970       1975      1980

                                    YEAR

Figure 11. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for black mullet
             landed in the Charlotte Harbor area over the amount landed
             for the west coast of Florida.

                                   103
<pb n="109" />

  3000 '

  2500 --

00

1500

            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area. Horizontal line
            indicates the 30 year average.
U

   100

    90
    50 -
      1950      955   1960         YEA 70               1975       960

 Figure 12. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for blue crab
            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area. Horizontal line

            indicates the 30 year average.

   600 --

    90
    60--

 U-U
 p-

    70 --
 I.-

 (2:
   ,. 50  --

    4,0   ---.

 o 30 -      -
 IA-

   ,o                                             ,t  /

                                               I I I

      1950     1955      1960       1965      1970      1975     1980
                                 YEAR

  Figure 13. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for blue crab
             landed in the Charlotte Harbor area over the amount
             landed for the west coast of Florida.

                                104
<pb n="110" />

  4000 -

  3000

" 2000-

o

i  1000-

      1950     1955      1960     1965       1970     1975      1980
                                YEAR

 Figure 14.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for bait shrimp
            landed in the Charlotte Harbor area. Horizontal line
            indicates the 30 year average.

                            105
<pb n="111" />

25146

20420

17098

6000

5000

4000

2000

 I000  -                              !

      1950      1955      1960      1965      19 70     1975       1980

       Note change in scale.      YEAR

Figure 15.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for red drum
             landed in the Lake Worth area. Horizontal line
             indicates the 31 year average.

    100 -

    90 -

 u  80 -

 U
    70-
 0

 60
 O 60 -,
 in
 . 50   -
  0
  40

 -L    30  -

    20 --

         950-   955        90 41 0 *965       197      0 1975       1980           I
       1950      1955      1960      1965       1970     1975       1980

                                      YEAR

Figure 16.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for red drum
             landed in the Lake Worth area over the amount landed
             for the east coast of Florida.

                                  106
<pb n="112" />

 218587 --

 101465 --
      o

 50000 --

 30000

 20000

 10000
 20000 --

 1  0000           -

      1950      1955      1960       1965      1970      1975      1980
                                    YEAR

Figure 17.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for spotted seatrout
             landed in the Lake Worth area. Horizontal line indicates
             the 31 year average.

    100 --

     90--

    80--
 U

     70  -
 U)

    60--

 &lt;   50--
 F-

 40

   30

  20 --

           4 0  --, -                           -

      1950      1955      1960       1965      1970      1975      1980

                                     YEAR

Figure 18.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for spotted seatrout
             landed in the Lake Worth area over the amount landed
             for the east coast of Florida.

                                  107
<pb n="113" />

  900 --

  700

  600--

 300
I-   -
'  400 --                                                                        I

   200 -

   100 --

       1950     1955      1960      1965.     1970      1975       !980
                                     YEAR

Figure 19.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for black mullet
               landed in the Lake Worth area.  Horizontal line indicates
               the 31 year average.

     100                                                                          1

     90

   ' 80 1

     70

     60  -
   U)

   &lt;I
     50--

   ° 40 -

      30  --

        950      955        960 o965           970         5       98--
        1950     1955      1960       1965     1970       19 5     1980
                                            YEAR

   Figure 20.  Annual summaries of Florida Landings for black mullet
                  landed in the Lake Worth area over the amount landed
                  for the east coast of Florida.

                                      108
<pb n="114" />

                 208900 --

                   6000 --

                   5000 --

                : 4000--

                 WOO
                  u

                 -J3000 --
                _.I

                 2000 -'

                   1000 -'

                        1950     1955       1960      1965      1 970     1975      1980

                          Note change in scale       YEAR

                 Figure 21. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for blue crab
                               landed in the Lake Worth area. Horizontal line
                               indicates the 30 year average.

                     100 --

                      90

                     80 -
                   70
                 C-,

                      70 --
                 p-

                 0 60 --

                  In
                  hi  50--
                 w                I

                  0
                  c   40-

                  0j  30--
                  -
                  LL
                  LL
                  ° 20 --

             O'
                       10 -

                        1950      1955      1960      1965      1970      1975     1980
                                                       YEAR

                  Figure 22. Annual summaries of Florida Landings for blue crab
                               landed in the Lake Worth area over the amount landed
                               for the east coast of Florida.

                                                    109
<pb n="115" />

110       I

110
<pb n="116" />

        Land Use and Vegetation Maps of
          Charlotte Harbor and Lake Worth:
          Historical and Recent
<pb n="117" />

          VI. LAND USE AND VEGETATION MAPS OF CHARLOTTE HARBOR AND LAKE WORTH:

              HISTORICAL AND RECENT

               A primary objective of this project was to develop a digital data base

          of coastal/estuarine habitat components and changes from 1940-50 to the

          present in a quantitative and geographically specific manner.

          VI A. BACKGROUND

                   The Florida Department of Transportation (DOT) Topographic Bureau was

             sub-contracted to provide the interpretation and mapping of historical and

          current land use, vegetation, and drainage patterns of the Charlotte Harbor

          and Lake Worth study sites.   For the current interpretation of Charlotte

          Harbor, controlled aerial photographs (flight altitude 12,000 ft, 2658 mn)

             were acquired in April, 1982 at a scale of 1:24,000 (I in = 2,000 ft; lcm=

          0.24 kin) utilizing a specially outfitted Rockwell Aerocommander.  Positive

          false color infrared transparencies were produced for standard photo-

          interpretation utilizing stereoscopic vision equipment.  Current interpre-

          tation for Lake Worth  involved color aerials flown in 1975.   Historical

*            interpretation involved using black and white aerial photographs taken in

          1940 for Lake Worth and 1946   and 1951 for Charlotte Harbor.   Interpre-

            tation  and  subsequent  classification  of  surface  features  followed  the

            scheme  of  Kuyper  et  al.  (1981).

               Land use, vegetation, and drainage categories were then digitized into

          the DOT computer graphics system. Digitized geographic data were placed in

          a point-vector data format in this proprietary system (Friedly and Unger
<pb n="118" />

1981).   Output mapping  products  include ballpoint  pen plots  on drawing

paper and ink plats on mylar overlays for USGS 7.5 minute quadrangles

(quads)  (1:24,000).   Because the maps are digitized,  adjacent 7.5 minute

quads may be merged to produce smaller scale maps typically at 1:48,000

scale (1"=4,000', 1.0 cm=O.48km).  Other products that will be available to

users are maps depicting only selected land use or vegetation categories,

such as seagrass and mangroves, without other features and graphics

displayed.   A combination of merging maps to any scale, and the selection

of one class to be displayed would result, for example, in a seagrass or

mangrove  map  of  Charlotte  Harbor.

VI  B.  PROBLEMS  AND  RECOMMENDATIONS

     DOT encountered several major difficulties in the interpretation and

digitization of the aerial photographs.  These problems resulted in a delay

in  final  map  production.

     The principal problem with interpretation of aerial photographs dealt

with  seagrass  delineations.   The historical  black and white photographs

presented an inherent lower quality for identifying seagrasses.  In addi-

tion, the historical aerials were interpreted before the 1982 photographs.

Because historical interpretations could not be ground truthed, a problem

in  the  interpretation  of  seagrasses  was  not  noticed  until  the  1982

photointerpretations  were  completed  and  comparative  acreages  computed.

Several historical photographs were reexamined and it became apparent that

general misinterpretations had occurred because of the unfamiliarity of the

photointerpreter  with  the  photographic  signatures  of  seagrasses.   The

                                    112
<pb n="119" />

recent color infrared aerials presented no such problem as the quality was

exceptional for seagrass delineation.  As a result of this finding, a time

consuming  reanalysis  and  digitization  of the  historical  seagrasses was

necessary.

    A similar problem occurred in the analysis of mangroves versus tropi-

cal hammocks. The interpreters classified much of the exceptionally large

mangrove fringe as tropical hammock.  This problem was again due to the in-

terpreter encountering new land cover signatures.  Until the study site was

visited,  this  problem was  not  realized.   Several  valuable  interpretive

methodologies were learned in this process:

         1.  Interpret the most recent aerials first.  These are generally

             of better quality and provide the photointerpreter with a

             feel of the study site.  This method may bias the historical

              interpretation, however, the bias is far outweighed by the

              increase in accuracy.

          2.  Visit the study site in the early stages of interpretation.

             This will eliminate obvious classification errors because of

              unfamiliarity with vegetation cover characteristics.

          3. Complete all ground truthing effort prior to digitization.

     Since  most  photointerpreters  are  unfamiliar  with  interpreting  sea-

grasses, some general comments on seagrass interpretation and quantifi-

cation follow:

          1.  Color   infrared  photography  provides  excellent   seagrass

              mapping  media  in  addition  to  the best  delineation  of all

              other  emerged  habitats.

          2. Low tide with clear waters (generally late October through

              early June) provide the best imagery.

                                    113
<pb n="120" />

         3. The relationship between the time of year the aerials were

            flown  to  the  seasonal  densities  of  seagrasses  is  under

            investigation (Section VIII 0).  It may have some impact on

            total acreages or perhaps on density descriptions.

         4. The 1982 aerials for Charlotte Harbor were of sufficient

            quality to develop a density classification system:

            901  (sparse  underwater  vegetation)  - This  class  was

             characteri zed   by approximately &gt;70% exposed  sand  in the

             actual meadow regardless of the patchiness observed within

             the  meadow  and  was  considered  minimal  as  habitat  cover.

             This  category  will  most  likely  be  the  subject  to

            misinterpretation   particularly   if   seasonal   differences

             exist.I

             903 (moderate to dense underwater vegetation) - This class

             encompassed all contiguous meadows with approximately &lt;30%I

             uniformally exposed sand.  No attempt was made to develop a

             separate  class  for  moderate  densities  because  of  the

             subjectiveness  in  interpretation  at  that  level.

             904 (Patchy underwater vegetation) - This category was

             characterized by large unvegetated patches within areas of

             &gt;1m2 moderate to dense grass.

    The  historical  aerials  were  simply  classified  as  seagrass  in oneI

category:

             645(submerged aquatic vegetation)

Only one classification  could  be interpreted  due to the quality of the

historical  aerials  and  the  absence  of  a method  for  ground  truthing.

                                  114
<pb n="121" />

   The major factor delaying map production was the digitization process.

This is a time-consuming job requiring an understanding of both the subject

matter and the complex digitization system.  The bottleneck in the digiti-

zation process occurred for two related reasons.  A system software upgrade

was implemented with the intent to streamline the digitization process and

provide the ability to compute acreages, to merge quads and to do other

needed  data  manipulations.    The  new  software  introduced  a series  of

deficiencies that required extensive time for correction.   This was com-

pounded by a series of hardware failures.   These delays created a severe

backlog in the digitization process.   Considering that this project was

only one of many priorities for production, the order by which jobs were

completed was weighed by the contractor.

VI C. DESCRIPTION OF MAP PRODUCTS

     The photointerpretation and ditgitizations were based on the U.S.

Geological Survey 7.5 minute by 7.5 minute quadrangle (quad) grids depicted

in Figure 23 for Charlotte Harbor and Figure 24 for Lake Worth.  The quads

are individually named both numerically and with a common descriptor.  The

common descriptor names have been used throuqhout this discussion.

     Included in the map pockets of this report are several maps to pro-

vide examples and references of the map products available and used in the

report.  They are as follows:

          Map 1. Drainage Map - Historical (El Jobean)

          Map 2.  Drainage Map - Recent (El Jobean)

          Map 3.  Land Use and Vegetation Map - Historical (Matlacha)
<pb n="122" />

  W         EL  JOB    A

                          &gt;   U  N  PUiA
PLACI         +          O
              16                                     I

 PORT ond
 BOCA  M9 QQ*§4A  i MOCHA
GRANDE \\4b

               TIV;A  ' i iND       MiI

            WULFER                 +

       Figure 23. Charlotte Harbor quadrangle names and locations.
                          116
<pb n="123" />

                      Iz /it   RIVIERA BEACH

                6BI e Feron Bt

              /

               / Okeec

                      Southen                   -PALM BEACH
                Southern Blv   -   :
                 / '     c

                                                Uninterpreted area

I  ; /

                                         -LAKE WORTH

                _804

               Figure 24.  Lake Worth quadrangle names and locations.

                                    117
<pb n="124" />

         Map 4. Land Use and Vegetation Map - Recent (Matlacha)

         Map 5. Merged Land Use and Vegetation - Recent (El Jobean,

                 Punta Gorda)

         Map 6. Merged Land Use and Vegetation - Recent (Placida, Port

                 Boca Grande)

         Map 7. Merged Land Use and Vegetation - Recent (Punta Gorda SW,

                 Punta Gorda SE, Bokeelia, Matlacha)

         Map 8.  Merged Land Use and Vegetation - Recent (Captiva, Pine

                  Island Center, Wulfert, Sanibel)

         Map 9.  Merged Land Use and Vegetation - Recent (Fort Myers SW,

                 Fort Myers Beach, Estero)

         Map 10. Land Use and Vegetation Map - Historical  (Riviera Beach)

         Map 11. Land Use and Vegetation Map - Recent (Riviera Beach)

    The reader/user should note that the historical and recent maps often

are not directly comparable.   Due to subjectivity in photo interpretation,

boundary lines are somewhat incongruous.   The maps, therefore, should not

be overlayed  to determine  temporal  changes  in classification  boundaries

except when making purely widescale, synoptic observations.

Drainage Maps:  Historical  and recent drainage maps have been produced and

are available for the Charlotte Harbor study area in quad or in merged

form.   Examples of these are Maps 1 and 2, depicting the historical  and

recent El Jobean quad.  These maps provide a visual inventory for non-point

source drainage pattern changes that have occurred.  Acreage of a drainage

system,  linear miles of canals, and other drainage schematics potentially

can be quantified to assess the non-point source runoff into the estuary.

                                    118
<pb n="125" />

3             Land Use and Vegetation  Inventory Maps:   Maps 3, 4, 10, and 11 represent

          the style of Land Use and Vegetation Inventory products produced for the

              Charlotte Harbor and Lake Worth study areas.  Appendix A provides users of

3           these products with the D.O.T. classification description  associated with

          the numerical classification codes.  Maps 3 and 4 represent historical and

3           recent  interpretations  of  the  Matlacha  quad  with  corresponding  acreage

          values. Maps 10 and 11 provide the same format for the Riviera Beach (Lake

             Worth) quad.   Because of the large number of individual  quads (15 recent

          and 15 historical for Charlotte Harbor and 3 recent and 3 historical for

              Lake Worth), the entire set of individual  interpreted quad maps could not

3            be  included  in  this  report.

3             Merged Maps:   Maps 4-9 are examples of the map product created by merging

          adjacent individual quad maps into a scale addressing a larger area.

             Unfortunately,  neither  a classification  key nor acreage values  could  be

3             incorporated  into the merged maps.   The user should refer to Appendix A

          where numerical classifications can be identified.

           VI  D.    CHARLOTTE  HARBOR

          VI Dl1. GENERAL SITE DESCRIPTION

 3                  The Charlotte  Harbor  estuarine  complex  began  to form  approximately

           5,000 years ago when a rise in sea level flooded the mouths of the Myakka

3             and Peace Rivers.  Flooding caused sediments to be deposited in a series of

          deltaic formations which began the in-filling of the present estuary.

                                               119
<pb n="126" />

This process also formed the present barrier island chain which began as a

spit of land north of the present Gasparilla Island.  River sediments and

those of the littoral  drift helped create the chain of barrier islands.

The resulting five major barrier islands of today (Gasparilla, Cayo Costa,

North Captiva, Captiva, and Sanibel) have joined, separated into additional

islands, and changed shapes continuously since their development  (Herwitz

1977).

     "Pine Island is believed to be a remnant of the original mainland,

that was isolated by a southerly shift in the river flow.  Then, as sedi-

ments  built  up at the  present  location  of Little  Pine  Island  and the

evolving shape of Sanibel Island restricted water flow, the estuary broke

through the Gulf, creating a deep channel near the present Boca Grande

Pass.  This pass eventually shifted to its present position (Herwitz 1977).

Other passes have been opened and closed by storm events and other natural

forces that are still  acting on the system today.   Both Cayo Costa and

North Captiva Island have had new cuts through them in the last year."

(Department of Natural Resources Bureau of Environmental Land Management

1983).

     Charlotte Harbor today (Figure 25) is approximately 56km long

encompassing at least 71,680 ha of water area.  Total shoreline includes

320km excluding the numerous mangrove islands.   Shallow water up to M.8M

predominates the estuary with natural depressions and channel margins of

1.8 to 3.7m and 3.7m or greater within channels and anchorages  (Taylor

1976).

     Three major rivers flow into Charlotte Harbor.  The Mayakka and Peace

Rivers, together draining a land area of approximately 76,800ha, flow into

                                   120
<pb n="127" />

                         km

                    'Son

       I  Lemon Bay           L -o

Gaspartifloa

                                                                          Octtle Pine

                    North               e  Co.iv

                 Coyo Costaj  ,'I   1-                  Matlsteo Pas

                                   Figure 25.     C halottlee Hror
                                            121   sln
<pb n="128" />

the northwest and northeast ends of Charlotte Harbor proper (Taylor 1976).

The Caloosahatchee River enters San Carlos Say, south of Charlotte Harbor

proper, draining about 307,200ha of land (Taylor 1976).

    The watershed of all three rivers contain areas of pasture land,

citrus groves, and cultivated ground.   In addition, the Peace River flowsI

through expansive sites of phosphate mines, while the Caloosahatchee

receivyes i ndustri al and domestic wastes from the urban areas surroundi ng

Fort Myers.

    During periods of low tide and heavy rainfall, high river flow reduces

surface salinity throughout the estuary and also offshore to a distance ofI

several kilometers. During high tide and low river flow, a saline wedge of

bottom water has been documented to 38 miles upstream in the Caloosahatchee

and well upstream in the Myakka and Peace Rivers (Taylor 1976).

     Aside from nutrient and waste inputs from the three river systems,

Charlotte Harbor has suffered very few detrimental impacts and remainsI

a relatively natural  ecosystem.   Beginning in 1977, the State of Florida

has purchased most of the land along Charlotte Harbor's shoreline, attempt-

ing to maintain a natural mangrove/marsh and, thereby, hopefully, a healthy

estuary.   In addition,  approximately 90% of the harbor itself exists as

fo ur aquatic preserves. However, behind some of this natural buffer area3

encroaches vast areas of development.

     "The Charlotte Harbor area has been the site of enormous subdivisionI

development during the past thirty years.   The General Development Corpo-

ration's Port Charlotte project covers almost 200 square miles inland from

Charlotte  Harbor,  between  the Myakka  and  Peace  Rivers.   The  projected

population of Charlotte County, if this and the other subdivisions

                                  122
<pb n="129" />

          presently platted in the county were .occupied, would be nearly 1,000,000

          people.   The 1980 U.S. census population for Charlotte County was 58,460.

                  "Cape  Coral,  Gulf American  Corporation's  subdivision  north  of the

          Caloosahatchee River and east of Matlacha Pass, covers approximately 96

          square  miles.    An  estimated  400,000  people  may  one  day  inhabit  that

j           presently incorporated  city.   The  1980  U.S.  census  population  for  Lee

          County was 205,266.   The Ft. Myers-(Cape Coral)-Lee County area has been

             identified in a number of reports as the fastest growing area in the United

          States."   (Department  of Natural  Resources  Bureau of Environmental  Land

U            Management  1983).

                   Obviously,  if wide-scale development continues with no consideration

          for environmental impact, Charlotte Harbor could change radically. Wang and

          Raney (1971) described Charlotte Harbor as one of the largest and least

          contaminated  estuarine  complexes  in  all  of Florida.   Today,  Charlotte

            Harbor retains that image.  Its unspoiled habitat houses over 40 endangered

          and  threatened  species,  including  at  least  15  active  eagle  nests.

                In addition, the harbor's importance as a productive fisheries

5            environment, both in the past and today, is emphasized by Figures 6 through

          14.    Hopefully,  the  future  will  find  Charlotte  Harbor  unchanged.

          VI IJ 2. GENERAL ACREAGE VALUES

 5                 Much  change  has  occurred  in  Charlotte  Harbor.    Table  6 provides

           acreage values  for ei ght  general  categories.   The ei ght categori es  are

          herein described. The number in parentheses following the category name is

          the DOT numerical  classification  code.   Appendix A provides  a complete

             descri pti on.

                                               123
<pb n="130" />

                        Table 6. CHARLOTTE HARBOR ACREAGE VALUES

Level 1 Land Use name         Urban            Agriculture         Rangeland          Forestland
Level 2. Land Use code         100                 200                 300                400
                  Year    1945   1982         1945   1982         1945   1982        1945   1982
 USGS Quadrangle Name                                                                                    I

 El Jobean              j    90  16657         1872    870       15222   2380         3586   1896

 Punta Gorda SW               0   1093            0      0        6459   5128          737   2247

 Placida                    283   1915            0    249        3688   1464          647   1783

 Bokeelia                   162   1593          541    444        1477   1181         2655   1864

 Port Boca Grande           299    300            0      0         360    458          229    292

 Captiva                     60    546           87      0         490    203          348    297

 Wul fert                    10    658           92      40       1045    329          461    875

 Sani bel                   113   3100           50      0        4456    668          494   1864

 Punta Gorda               1270  16412         2336   1534       12319   1810         4106   1937

 Punta Gorda SE               9   4249          454   1460        8237   1543         4341   6701

 Matlacha                     7  13561         1051    783       16155   866          4641   6348I

 Pine Island Center           1   9120          490    954       10064  1482          4159   3786

 Fort Myers Beach           320   2734          855    504        4321   982           908   2221

 Fort Myers SW             1006  22556         5091   3288       16086   583          5341   3472

 Estero                      80   1611   I      218    157  I     5840  1627  I       1930   4908

         TOTAL ACRES       3710  96105   I13137  10283  I106219 20704  I             34583  40491

      % TOTAL ACRES           1%    16%          2%      2%         t7%    3%            6%     7%/

 Acreage Change              +92395       I       -2854      I     -85515               +5908
 Percent (%) Change          + 2490%      I       -  22      I     -   81%              +  17%

                                                           124
<pb n="131" />

                       Table 6. CHARLOTTE HARBOR ACREAGE VALUES
                                          (Continued)

                                                                                   Transportati or
Level 1 Land Use name         Water              Wetlands         Barrenland        and Utilities
Level i Land Use code          500                 600                 700                800
                  Year    1945   1982         1945   1982         1945   1982         1945   1982

 USGS Quadrangle Name

 El Jobean                11231  12400        8772   6899          819   1176          178    287

 Punta Gorda S.W.         17406  18191       18065  15762            2    148           21      34

 Placida                  33038  33711        4321   2979          447    319          170    207

 Bokeelia                 21126  21886       15861  15213          704    405           62      66

 Port Boca Grande         41150  41354          421     98         131      77          58      49

 Captiva                  20426  30159       21008  11292          233    192           45      13

 Wulfert                  36428  37581         4311   3100         354    143           37      16

 Sanibel                  28795  29960        8548   6896          195    172           89      75

 Punta Gorda              13876  14037        7197   3906          911   1564          531   1357

 Punta Gorda S.E.         19347  19850         9456   7772         749    870           14    164

 Matlacha                  8462   9090        12230  10900          43    942           71    175

 Pine Island Center        3598   5214       24122  21843          107      80         146    207

 Fort Myers Beach         24786  25572       11371   9755          143    615           28    366

 Fort Myers SW             7643   9847        6253   1844         1147    840          126    263

 Estero                    1487   3853        8290   5644          217    283          225    154

        TOTAL ACRES    288799 312705        160226 123903         6202   7826        1801   3433

 Acreage Change             +23906             -36323               +1624               +1632
 Percent (%) Change         +    8%           -   23%               +  26%              +  91%

                                                125
<pb n="132" />

    Urban and Built Up (100)

     In 1944-45, the Charlotte Harbor area had 3,710 acres classified as

urban.   The Punta Gorda  and Fort Myers  SW quads comprised  61% of this

total.   The 1982 inventory showed 96,105 acres (a 2490% increase).   Fort

Myers  SW  experienced  the  greatest  increase  from  1,006  acres  to 22,556U

acres (23% of the total).

    Striking urban features in the Charlotte Harbor area are the massive

1960-1970's land boom development tracts where huge areas were cleared and

roads were built.   Few, if any, have dwellings.   Most of the tracts also

have  canals  for  land  drainage  and  harbor  access.    These  urban  tractsI

(classification 192) comprise 47,298 acres (49%) of the total urban area.

If these tracts alone are developed, assuming 4 dwellings/acre and 3

persons/dwelling,  567,576  new  residents  can  impact  the  area  with  no

additional  land development.  This would cause a significant impact on the

Charlotte  Harbor  area  if  not  properly  planned.

     Agriculture  (200)I

    As  evidenced  by  the  acreage  values,  agriculture  is  not  a major

industry  in  the  Charlotte  Harbor  study  area.   The  historical  acreages

(13,137 acres) decreased 22% to 10,283 acres at present.  The bulk of this

acreage is pasture land or citrus crops.

     Rangeland  (300)

     Rangeland  decreased  81% from  106,219  acres  to  20,704  acres.   The

primary acreages in this category were shrub and brushland characterized by

scattered  pines,  palmetto  and  grasses.    These  vegetation  types  often

                                   126
<pb n="133" />

support cattle grazing, however, this is not quantified.  It may be assumed

that most of the acreage loss (85,515 acres) transferred to urban gains

(92,395  acres).   The  shrub/brushland  type  areas  supported  the greatest

upland  loss  in  the  study  area.

     Forestland  (400)

     Forestland was the only Level I vegetation category to increase in

acreage  (17%) from 34,583 to 40,491  acres.   The majority of forestland

acreage is pine flatwoods.   A large increase in exotic forestland  (i.e.

Brazilian pepper, Melaluca, and Australian pine) was observed during this

time period.   These species compete with natural rangelands, forestlands,

and wetland mangroves, accounting for the greatest forest habitat altera-

tion.

     Water  (500)

     This  category increased 8% from 288,799 acres to 312,705 acres.  Most

of the increase may be attributed to canals and vegetated (seagrass) bottom

loss.    Water  comprised  the  major  acreage  of  the  study  area.

     Wetlands  (600)

     Wetlands experienced a 23% decrease in acreage from 162,226 acres to

123,903 acres.   The major  decrease  in this  category was  seagrass  (sub-

merged aquatic vegetation).  Wetlands (fishery habitats) will be discussed

in  detail  in  the  following  section.

                                    127
<pb n="134" />

     Barrenland  (700)

     Barrenland  increased  26% from  6,202  acres  to  7,826  acres.    Some

barrenland  beach  categories  are  important  nesting  habitat  for  terns,

skimmers,  and  other  open-ground  nesting  birds.

     Transporation (800)

     A 91% increase from 1,801 acres to 3,433 acres was observed in the

study area. This directly reflects the increased development.

     Special  Category  (900)

     This category was used to record the 1982 seagrass densities and will

be discussed  later  in the following  section.   The  historical  seagrass

inventory was  included under Wetlands (600) as code 645.  For comparable

total wetlands acreages, the 1982 900 category has been added to the 1982

600 category in Table 6.

VI D 3.  FISHERIES HABITAT COMPONENT ACREAGES

     Fisheries habitat is considered the geoqraphical, physical, chemical

and biological environment in which a species can find food, cover, and re-

produce during the various stages of its life cycle.  A fisheries habitat

component for this report is defined as a specific remotely-sensed and in-

terpretable  submerged  or  emerged  vegetated  or  non-vegetated  class.

Different species at different ages can utilize many different habitat

components  or  can  be monospecific  as  to  habitat  component.    Although

different  habitat  components  can  be  readily  defined,  a specific  fish

                                    128
<pb n="135" />

          habitat may only be determined through extensive sampling and research.

          This report delineates some of the habitat components currently considered

          important to fisheries production in general, but neglects many of the more

          transient components  such as salinity, temperature,  turbidity, etc.   Some

          of these interpretable  components  include mangroves,  seagrass beds,  salt

          marshes,  non-vegetated  tidal  flats  (mud flats),  and oyster  reefs.   They

          provide cover and an indirect food source for over 70% of Florida's

          recreational and commercial fisheries species. Table 7 provides historical

*             and recent acreage values for these fisheries habitat components.

               Mangroves (612)

               Section 11 C I provides a complete discussion of mangroves and can be

          reviewed to familiarize the reader with the role of mangroves in estuaries.

          Species delineation was not attempted within the mangrove category.   A 10%

          increase, 51,524 acres to 56,631 acres, was recorded for the study area.

               These results are surprising because they do not follow the general

          trend for wetland  loss.   State and local  regulations protecting the man-

          grove fringe surrounding Charlotte Harbor were enacted prior to any large-

          scale destruction. Consequently, very few mangrove areas have been dredged

          or filled and, in fact, area] coverage has increased by 5,107 acres.  In-

          creases can be explained  by natural  growth.   It appears that much of the

          mangrove increase could be related to the 8,158 acre loss of non-vegetated

          tidal flat.  Tidal flats provide suitable locations for mangrove seedlings

          to take hold.   If conditions  are suitable for growth, new mangrove stands

          can be propagated.   Other factors such as rising sea level, spoil island

          creation, marsh succession, and restoration can explain increases, but they

                                              129
<pb n="136" />

             Table 7. CHARLOTTE HARBOR FISHERIES HABITAT COMPONENT ACREAGES

                       Non-Vegetated
Habitat Component Mangrove Tidal Flat Oyster Reef Saltmarsh Seagrass
      Year 1945 1982 1945 1982 1945 1982 1945 1982 1945 1982

USGS Quadrangle Name

E1 Jobean 3433 4321 757 126 0 4 1762 1528 1632 894

Punta Gorda SW 6885 8251 2930 1079 173 28 436 169 6881 5760

Placida 1083 968 267 142 55 56 157 0 2610 1566

Bokeelia 3544 3731 52 31 0 38 29 24 12154 11367

Port Boca Grande 39 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 382 66

Captiva 1033 1121 57 0 0 2 0 7 19907 10162

Wulfert 1392 1426 0 0 0 0 0 0 2749 1674

Sanibel 3067 2943 148 3 8 10 22 0 5296 3940

Punta Gorda 4310 2799 858 95 4 5 550 140 892 772

Punta Gorda SE 2821 3502 1081 255 0 0 424 0 4246 3562

Matlacha 4243 5821 1268 51 0 8 462 0 5780 4940

Pine Island Center 8937 11291 2324 358 515 303 709 197 11462 9684

Fort Myers Beach 6032 5955 775 362 2 3 767 747 3586 2626

Fort Myers SW 1936 1190 378 53 0 0 1384 341 1465                                                                                                                                                  189

Estero 2769 3280 311 168 49 31 549 394 3917 1293

      TOTAL 51524 56631 11206 2723 806 488 7251 3547 82959 58495

Acreage Change +5107 -8483 -318 -3704 -24464
Percent (%) Change + 10% 76% - 39% - 51% - 29%
                                 130
<pb n="137" />

            are  most  likely  minor  in  this  case.

               The only quads showing mangrove losses were Placida, Port Boca Grande,

          Sanibel, Punta Gorda, Ft. Myers Beach, and Ft. Myers SW.  These areas lost

          a total of 2,581 acres of which Punta Gorda comprised 1,511 acres or 59% of

          the loss.   Punta Gorda is one of the oldest  developed  areas within the

*           Charlotte Harbor study site and the mangrove loss can be attributed to the

          early waterfront development that eliminated fringing mangroves.

               The quads with the greatest increase in mangrove acreage were Punta
          Gorda SW, Matlacha, and Pine  Island Center  (+5,298 acres).   Pine Island

          Center had the largest increase at 2,354 acres or 46% of the total

          increase. These same quads had the largest decrease in non-vegetated tidal

          flats (5,034 acres or 59% of the decrease). This further substantiates the

            hypothesis that the conversion of tidal  flats was a major portion of the

          mangrove increase.

               It is apparent that the protection and preservation of mangroves in

          the Charlotte Harbor area has helped to stabilize the existence of this

          habitat component for fisheries utilization.

               Non-Vegetated Tidal Flat (651)

                   Section II C 4 provides a discussion of tidal flats, i.e., mud flats.

          A 76% decrease in non-vegetated tidal flats (from 11,206 acres to 2,723

          acres)  was  observed.   As discussed  in the  preceding  category,  mangrove

          increases  appear to account  for loss of tidal  flat.   Pine Island Center

          experienced the largest decrease in tidal flats and the largest increase in

            mangroves.    This is a natural  loss of tidal flats and the total  acreages

          involved account for only a small fraction of the entire area of fisheries

          habitat components considered.

                                              131
<pb n="138" />

    Oyster  Reefs  (654)

    Section  II C 5 discusses oyster reefs as a habitat component.   The

acreages observed for oyster reefs are most likely low for two reasons:

(1) The reefs are often too small for photointerpretation, and (2) turbid

waters often associated with these areas render the reefs difficult to

remotely sense.  Larger reef areas have been delineated and show a 38% de-

cline from 806 to 488 acres.   Punta Gorda SW (Turtle Bay) and Pine Island

Center (Matlacha Pass) supported the historical highest acreages with 173

and 515 acres respectively. The recent interpretations indicate that Pine

Island Center and Placida have the highest acreages, with 303 and 56 acres

respectively.   Reasons for loss are purely speculative but could involve

overharvesting,  circulation  changes,  and  particularly  salinity  changes.

     Salt  Marshes  (642)

     Section II C 3 contains a detailed discussion on salt marshes.  A 51%

decrease in salt marsh acreage, from 7,521 to 3,547 acres, was observed in

the study area.  El Jobean comprised a historical high of 1,762 acres (24%

of the total) and also contains the highest recent acreage of 1,528 acres

or 43% of the total.   Punta Gorda,  Punta Gorda SE, Matlacha, and Pine

Island Center, and Fort Myers SW incurred the greatest losses (as much as

100%) accounting for 77% of the salt marsh loss.

     The loss of salt marshes can be directly attributed to the major land

developments.  Although these developments did not always directly destroy

the marshes, they apparently indirectly destroyed them by canalization.

The digging and networking of canals (see Drainage Maps 1 and 2 for visual

impact) in order to drain the low-lying uplands has apparently served to

                                   132
<pb n="139" />

divert the natural  flow of freshwater away from the salt marshes.   This

would  cause  saltwater  intrusion  allowing  mangroves  to  outcompete  and

succeed the marsh  habitat.   This succession  is well  documented  in four

quads:   Punta Gorda,  Punta Gorda SE, Matlacha, and Pine Island Center.

    The direct loss (removal) of salt marshes could be catastrophic to

many organisms, but the impact caused by succession from saltmarsh to

mangroves is unknown.  The major losses occurred where there was relatively

low  marsh  acreage  originally.    The  greatest  acreage  of  salt  marshes

occurred up the Myakka and Peace Rivers, out of the study area.  Succession

from marsh to mangrove may be immaterial  at least to fisheries species,

however, it is certainly significant to the above water community, such as

birds, and also to the benthic infauna.

Seagrasses (645 historical; 901, 903, 904 recent)

     A complete discussion on seagrasses is found in Section II B.  Also

Section II C 2 should be consulted in reference to problems encountered in

mapping seagrasses  (specifically the historical photointerpretation).  The

level of accuracy in delineating historical extent of seagrasses cannot be

assessed by groundtruthing.  The fact that they are submerged introduces an

optical  variation  not  found  in emergent  vegetation  and  can  affect  the

interpretation.    The  1982  photointerpretations,  however,  were  of

exceptional  quality and extensively groundtruthed; we are quite confident

in  their  accuracy.

     A 29% decrease in seagrass, from 82,959 acres to 58,495 acres, was

observed between 1944 and 1982.  This is substantial  and surprising since

the Charlotte Harbor estuary is perceived as an area of little detrimental

                                   133
<pb n="140" />

impact.   Virtually every quad experienced decreases in seagrass acreages.

The largest loss occurred in the Captiva quad with a 9,745 acre loss or 40%

of the total  Charlotte  Harbor  seagrass  decline.   The  adjacent Wulfert,

Sanibel, and Pine Island Center quads also accrued substantial losses;

these four quads comprise Pine Island Sound and account for 57% of the

total  loss  in  seagrasses.

     Several factors that most likely account for the loss of seagrasses in

this specific area.  When reviewing nautical charts of Pine Island Sound, a

subjective  analysis  of  tidal  circulation  can  be  made  by  observing

topographic patterns.  A shallow bar extending entirely across Pine Island

Sound (&lt;5 ft depth) is a prominent feature and was apparently the location

of the first channel dredging operation (sometime before 1948) in the area.

Deeper tidal channels (8-15 ft) existed on both sides of the bar.  It was

likely that this bar area represented a tidal node.   During an ebb tide,

flow occurred to the north above the bar and to the south below the bar.

Coastal Engineering Laboratory (1958, c.f. Esteves 1981) determined the

tidal node to be just to the north and south of Redfish Pass, substanti-

ating  the  implication  that  the  shallow bar historically delineated  the

tidal node.

     In the early 1960's, several  major  alterations  to the Pine  Island

Sound area occurred that appear to have dramatically affected the

ecosystem.   (1) The Intracoastal Waterway was dredged through Pine Island

Sound and up the Caloosahatchee River, (2) The Sanibel Causeway was con-

structed across San Carlo Bay.  Even before 1960, the Caloosahatchee River

was  channelized  to  Lake  Okeechobee  and  lock  systems  were  installed.

     Prior to these alterations, Pine Island Sound was under oceanic in-

                                   134
<pb n="141" />

          fluence, with sponges, some corals, Thalassia and other higher salinity

          species growing within the Sound (Art Marshal, personal communication).
             Esteves et a].  (1981) presented excerpts from a U.S.F.W.S. report to the

          U.S. Army Corp. of Engineers on the construction of the Sanibel Causeway:

                    The U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service has reviewed the
                    application of the Board of Lee County Commissioners,
                    Fort Myers, Florida, for a Department of the Army
                    permit (Bridges 1057) to construct a causeway with
                    three bridges across San Carlos Bay so as to connect
                     Sanibel Island with the mainland at Punta Rassa in
                    Lee County, Florida.

                    The project as proposed would adversely affect the
                        fish  and  wildlife  resources  of  the  area  in  two  dif-
                    ferent  ways.    One  of  these  would  be  the  effect  of
                    dredging  and  filling.    The  bottom  plant  and  animal
                        communities  in  the  areas  to  be  filled  would  be  per-
                    manently  destroyed.    The  communities  in  the  areas  to
                    be dredged would be destroyed at least temporarily and
                         permanently if frequent maintenance dredging were required
                    Such reduction in bottom communities would have the
                    effect of reducing important fish populations to some
                          degree.
                    A second effect of the project, and a much more damag-
                     ing one, would result from reduced salinities in lower
                         Pine Island Sound, San Carlos Bay, Matlacha Pass, and
                    the lower estuary of the Caloosahatchee River. With
                     lowering of the salinity, changes in the biota would
                     result. As a particular example, the scallop beds of
                     lower Pine Island Sound might very well be eliminated,
                     inasmuch as these mollusks reqiuire salinities of
                     better than 20 parts per thousand. In more complex
                     fashion, the abundance of some of the brackish and
                     marine fishes in the area would be reduced.

                    The above report was very prophetic.   After causeway construction  in

              1962, the area went from a major scallop producer in Florida (as great as
           180,000 lbs/yr) to no scallop population by 1964. Circulation alterations
           caused  by the  causeway  diverting  flow into  Pine  Island  Sound  from the
           Caloosahatchee River were probably the primary reasons for the scallop

*             loss.
                                                               135
<pb n="142" />

    The effects on seagrass communities are as apparent as that on the

scallops, perhaps compounded by dredging for the Intercoastal Waterway.

The 13,936 acre seagrass loss in the four mid and lower Pine Island SoundI

quads primarily occurred in the deeper portions of the water (&gt;3 ft). With

the described construction projects the location of the tidal node has most

likely been artificially destroyed or dramatically shifted.   Thi s may be

explained if the causeway is considered a dam impeding the outflow of

freshwater from the Caloosahatchee.  This would create a high pressure at

the low end of the sound inducing a net flow of freshwater up Matlacha Pass

and Pine Island Sound.   The tannins and particulates  associated with theI

freshwater would increase turbidity and consequently reduce water clarity.3

Compounded by direct destruction and reintroduction of fine sediments into

the environment by dredging, a decrease in seagrasses would be expected and3

has certainly occurred.

    Although exact explanations cannot account for seagrass losses in

other portions of the study area, some analogies may be implied.   Primary

seagrass loss has been in the deeper portions of the Harbor, at the fring-

ing bars, and in lagoonal-type areas.   Very little direct destruction has3

occurred.    It  is  likely  that  overall  changes  in drainage  patterns  and

introduction of sewage pollutants and storm water runoff has served to3

increase the suspended load in the Harbor.  The loss of natural filtration

of nutrients also has probably increased the phytoplankton production. AllI

of these factors would synergistically act to increase turbidity in the

Harbor and eliminate seagrass meadows in the deeper waters.

     Whether the loss is continuing is unknown and can only be assessed3

through periodic monitoring  and mapping.   The predominant  grass beds are

                                   136
<pb n="143" />

          located  in  the  very  shallow  waters  behind  protective  sandbars.    if

          circulation patterns change and bars are altered, additional  losses may be

             expected.  If turbidities increase, the seagrass meadows will exist only in

3           the  shallowest  waters.

               The long term alteration of this fisheries habitat component may one

3            day have a pronounced effect on fisheries of the area.   With every new

          canal, lawn, road, storm pipe, sewage treatment facility, septic tank,

             etc., additional nutrients and particulates are introduced into the system.

          This can potentially increase turbidity and alter water quality to an

          extent  that    further  losses  may  occur.    In  addition,  as  the  human

3            population  increases,  boating  pressure  and  propeller  damage  to  the

          shallower seagrass beds will  occur.   On-site management  of this habitat

3           component,  which  the  Department  of  Natural  Resources  Aquatic  Preserve

          Program provides  in Charlotte Harbor, is important.   However,  concurrent

             upland management must occur also.  Unlike for mangroves and other emergent

3            vegetation types, seagrasses are not readily observable and, unfortunately,

          management considerations typically have not applied to seagrasses.  This

3           trend  is changing,  but further  research must  be conducted  on declining

           seagrass populations to determine exact causative factors of loss and

3            determine the best possible approaches  for management.   This should  not

           preclude effective management today.

3            VI  D 4.  COMPARISON BETWEEN FISHERIES STATISTICS AND HABITAT ALTERATION

 3                At  the  onset  of  this  project  it was  realized  that  the  available

           commerci al  fi sheri es  stati sti cs  as  landings  data were  inadequate  for  a

         3                                                   137
<pb n="144" />

confident comparison to habitat alterations and loss (see Section VI 8).

At this point, in the total scope of the project, a comparative analysis

will not be attempted.   Certain subjective comparisons can be made such as5

the total loss of the scallop industry discussed in Section VI D 3, but

quantitative analysis is not possible.  We have documented the areal extentI

and location of many of the fisheries habitat components and have docu-

mented their alterations over a 35-40 year period.   Florida is attempting

to develop a State fisheries statistics program in cooperation with NMFS

which will provide the proper data needed for area-specific commercial

catch  and  effort  data,  as  well  as  recreational  data.5

    Section V E 2 presents existing fisheries statistics for the Charlotte

Harbor area.  The general trend for the target species is for increases in

landings.  But we do not know how much effort (man hours, number of trips,5

length of trips, etc.) was required per pound landed to assess if this

reflects an increase, decrease, or stability in the total population.

However, the trends are evident and may prove beneficial for comparative

purposes.I

    With this in consideration, a future report (CM-69) will compare

habitat component alterations and fisheries statistics of Charlotte Harbor

and Tampa Bay.  This comparative analysis will provide a basis for manage-

ment decisions even though the results may be subjective in their presen-

tation.    We  can  logically  deduce  that  loss  of  fisheries  habitat  will

eventually  result  in  changes  in  fisheries  yield.    Loss  in  habitat

components  may be a direct or indirect cause and, thus,  a direct or in                  -

direct measure of fisheries population changes.  Only continued research on

the entire life hi stories of the species in different areas will provide

the direct or synergistic relationships to the habitats in which they live.

                                  138
<pb n="145" />

          VI E. LAKE WORTH

U             VI E 1.  GENERAL SITE DESCRIPTION

               As sea levels declined following the Ice Age, Lake Worth, then a

j           saltwater  lagoon,  became elevated  above sea level  and became  a predomi-

          nately freshwater system.   Extreme high tides and waves, high freshwater,

          and storms occasionally breached the thin eastern rock and sand ridge (now

          the island of Palm Beach) that separated Lake Worth from the Atlantic

            Ocean,  forming  natural  inlets.    These  inlets  were  unstable  and  closed

            spontaneously  within  a short  period  of  time,  returning  the  system  to

          freshwater. A sand ridge immediately west of Lake Worth separated the lake

          from the mainland. This ridge ran continuously from the Hillsborough River

          north to the Loxahatchee River where it then turned east, connecting to the

            eastern sand-rock ridge.  The ridge was bordered on the north and west by a

3            system of lakes and sawgrass sloughs.   By 1845, two islands in Lake Worth

          existed naturally:  Big Munyon Island and Hypoluxo Island.  Vast freshwater

            marshes surrounded the lake and freshwater grassbeds grew within.

                In the 1860's, the first manmade inlet to the Atlantic Ocean was

            excavated north of the present site of the North Palm Beach inlet, but it

           soon closed naturally.   In 1877, a relatively stable inlet was cut through

             a section of the eastern ridge that stood 25 feet above sea level.  A rapid

3            conversion  took  place  changing  the  freshwater  system  to  a  saltwater

          environment.    Beach  sand  swept  in through  tidal  action  smothering  the

3           bottom vegetation and benthic organisms, replacing them with organic muds.

           By the late 1800's, mangroves replaced the freshwater marshes.

                                               139
<pb n="146" />

    The area's resident population was approximately 1,000 persons in

1894.  During the 1890's, resort developers began filling the wetland edges

of Lake Worth .   At the same time, the East Coast Canal Company finished

dredging a navigational canal, now part of the Intracoastal Waterway, that

extended from the north end of Lake Worth through the northern sand ridgeI

and  sawgrass  sloughs  to the  Jupiter  Inlet.   Water that  had previously

flowed from portions of the mainland inland to the Jupiter Inlet was now

directed south into Lake Worth, thus increasing the organic load of the

Ilake.   In the early 1900's, the Intracoastal  Waterway was completed from

the south end of Lake Worth to Biscayne Bay.I

    By 1915, the Port of Palm Beach created an inlet 4' deep at the north

end of Lake Worth. Dredge and fill activities replaced more and more acres

of mangroves in the 1920's.   By 1925, 4 additional alterations were com-

pleted. (1) The North Lake Worth inlet was deepened to 16' and bulkheaded.

Peanut Island was created by the dumping of dredge spoil during creation of

North Lake Worth Inlet.  (2) The South Lake Worth inlet was constructed to

help flush Lake Worth, however, tidal action increased sand deposition intoI

Lake Worth.  (3) The West Palm Beach Canal was completed by the EvergladesI

Drainage District (EDO), connecting Lake Okeechobee to the Atlantic Ocean.

This canal functioned for drainage and transportation and was provided with

two water control structures, one at Lake Okeechobee and the other on the

coast  at the fresh  and salt water  interface.   (4) Part of the naturalI

sawgrass  slough  system  of  the  mainland  was  impounded  and  inflow  was

diverted into Clear Lake and Lake Mangoni a to serve as a water supply for

the cities of West Palm Beach and Palm Beach.  Resident population at this

time was approximately 30,000.

                                   140
<pb n="147" />

                The West Palm Beach Canal and alteration of the mainland drainage

           pattern greatly affected urbanization.   Prior to these changes, settlement

              occurred primarily on the island of Palm Beach and along the high and dry

           sand ridge bordering Lake Worth.   Now,  however,  drainage made available

           much  more  l and  f or  development.    Urbanization  and  agriculture  quickly

           spread west, placing additional  pressures on surface waters of the area,

           including Lake Worth.

                    By 1950, resident  population  of West  Palm Beach  increased  to over

           43,000.   The entire  urban  development  at that  time was  discharging  10

           million gallons of raw sewage daily directly into Lake Worth or through

           septic tanks into ground waters.    Already, much of Lake Worth shoreline

           had  been  dredged,  filled,  and  bulkheaded.    The  cumulative  effect  of

5             interior  drainage,  agricultural  and  urban  runoff,  sewage  disposal,  and

           shoreline development peaked in the early 1950's. Concurrently the cost of

             waterfront property skyrocketed.  In 1959, Munyon Island was significantly

           enlarged by deposition of dredge spoil.  In 1967 North Palm Beach Inlet was

           further dredged to 35'.  By 1972, almost the entire Lake Worth shoreline

5             was urbanized  with  half the shoreline bulkheaded.   Figure 26 describes

           Lake Worth.

                    Between 1950 and the present, several  steps to improve the lake have

           been taken.  Dredge and fill and bulkhead operations have been prohibited.

           By mid-1960, 70% of the urban population was served by sewage treatment

           facilities.  A massive cleanup occurred through the 1970's resulting i11 all

           sewage receiving secondary treatment prior to disposal.

 5                  Today,  Lake  Worth  receives  saltwater  input  from  the  intracoastal

           waterways and from the two inlets directly opening Lake Worth to the

         5                                                     141
<pb n="148" />

·  .;  .,'... .   ': · ·'4

                  Intracooastal waterway

                  Munyon Islands
'::   4 '         C17 Canal

       *  g fPeanut Island
      il, T -----North Lake Worth Inlet

   *   .: ,.w,.. - '
    .. eF3                       3 km    N

    ·- -   -    Loke Worth

        K.    ,i  C51 Canal

                       Atlantic Ocean

                 C16 Canal
                  Hypoluxo Island
                  Beercan Island
        .... ----South Lake Worth Inlet

                  Intracoastal waterway

           Figure 26. Lake Worth..

                   142
<pb n="149" />

Atlantic.   Freshwater  input  arrives  from 7 sources with the C-51 canal

being the major source of freshwater and a major source of nutrients and

pollutants (Table 8).

     Table 8. SOURCES OF FRESHWATER FLOWING INTO LAKE WORTH

     SOURCE                             % OF TOTAL FRESHWATER INPUT

     C-17 canal                         12.1%

     C-51 canal                         49.7% (75% flows north,

                                             25% flows south)

     C-16 canal                         10.7%

     WPB Sewage Treatment Plant          1.3%

     Boynton Sewage Treatment Plant    0.3%

     Surface runoff                      4.1%

     Groundwater discharge              22.3%

     In summary, Lake Worth naturally evolved from a saltwater lagoon to a

fresh-water  lake.   Man-made changes modified the lake into an estuarine

lagoon.   Though it is not feasible to return Lake Worth  to its original

freshwater condition, it is desirable to maintain the lake as a productive

estuary.

                                    143
<pb n="150" />

VI E 2. GENERAL ACREAGE VALUES

    Several inconsistencies exist with the interpretation of the threeI

Lake Worth quads that did not occur with any of the Charlotte Harbor quads.

The Lake Worth study site did not extend entirely to the western boundaries

of the three quads; it stopped approximately 1.5 km east of the western

edge (See Figure 24).  However, the contractor continued interpretation to

the western boundary on the 1975 Riviera Beach quad.   Since the extended

interpretation also included acreage values, only those categories that are

not included within the 1.5 km interpretation extension are accurate forI

comparing the historical  and recent Riviera Beach quads.   These include

only marine  waters  and marine  wetlands.    However,  all  categories  were

compared between historical  and recent  interpretation  of   the other two

Lake Worth  quads.   Also the Atlantic Ocean was classified  as "Bays and

Estuaries" on both the historical and recent Lake Worth quad maps.

Another interpretation error is the delineation of reefs for all 1940 quads

but not for the  1975 quads.   Reviewing the 1975 aerial  photographs  and

ground  truthing  revealed  that  these  reefs  still  exist.I

     Table  9  lists  the  eight  general  categories  and  their  associated

historical and recent acreage values.  Since seagrasses. were classified as

a special category (900) for the recent interpretation, these values were

added to the recent wetlands' values (600). Historically, seagrasses wereI

classified under the wetlands category.

     The following paragraphs describe the Level  I acreage changes.   The

numbers  in  parentheses  following  the  category  name  relate  to  the

interpretation  index  numbers  as  found  on  the  maps.

                                   144
<pb n="151" />

                             Table 9. LAKE WORTH ACREAGE VALUES

Level 1 Land Use name         Urban            Agriculture         Rangeland          Forestland
Level 1 Land Use code          100                 200                 300                400
                  Year    1940   1975         T940      IT   T-40T75                 T940 T975

 USGS Quadrangle Name

 Riviera Beach             5274  15499         1217   1440       15408   2015         3493   4204

 Palm Beach                8788  16910          525    427        6599    427          809   1326

 Lake Worth                3490  14500        4340   1633         4663   1324         5566   2201

        TOTAL ACRES      17552  46909         6082   3500        26670   3766        9868   7731

 Acreage Change1            +19132                -2805              -9511               -2848
 Percent (%) Change1        +  159%               -  58%            -  84%               -  45%

                                                                                  Transportation
Level 1 Land Use name         Water              Wetlands         Barrenland        and Utilities
Level 1 Land Use code          500                 600                 700                800
                  Year    1940  1975 1940   1975                  1940   1975         1940   1975

 USGS Quadrangle Name

 Riviera Beach            31255  16168        13863   1226         896   1060          732   1001

 Palm Beach               13740  15962         5691    212         461    111          658   2676

 Lake Worth               15307  16911        4733    373          420    838          211   1147

        TOTAL ACRES      60302  49041        24287   1811         1777   2009        1601   4824

 Acreage Change1            +3826                 -22476            + 68                 +2956
 Percent (%) Change1        +  13%                -   93%           + 08%                + 341%

1The Riviera Beach quad acreage values are not included in these totals since different
 size areas were photointerpreted for that quad.

                                               145
<pb n="152" />

    Urban (100)1

    Urban area increased 159%, from 12,278 acres to  31,410 acres.   The

Palm Beach quad nearly doubled  in urban area while the Lake Worth quad

quadrupled.   The majority of the urban category is residential  housing.

Since  much  of the  area  immediately  surrounding  Lake Worth  was  already

urbanized by 1940, much of this increase occurred farther inland.

    Agriculture (200)1

    Agriculture land decreased by 3,805 acres, a 58% decrease.  The Lake

Worth quad experienced 97% of this loss accounting for 2,707 acres.  Most

of the lost agricultural land was replaced by urban area and occurred

inland from Lake Worth.

    Rangeland (300)1

    Rangeland decreased by 84%, a loss of 9,511 acres. This rangeland was

converted into urban area and, like the agriculture class above, occurred

inland  of  Lake  Worth.

     Forestland  (400)1

     Forestland lost 2,848 acres, a decrease of 45%.  This value does not

reflect a true loss of natural forestland because it includes acreage

increases  of  exotic  species.   These  increases  include  1,514  acres  of

Brazilian Pepper, 331 acres of Melaleuca, and 215 acres of Australian Pine.

'Does  not  include  acreage  data  from  the  Riviera  Beach  quad.

                                   146
<pb n="153" />

Conversely, natural pine flatwoods lost 3,680 acres, a decline of 76%.  In

addition, sandpine scrub, one of Florida's most unique natural upland

habitats,  lost  511  acres,  an  85%  decline.

    Water (500)1

    Water area increased 13%, a gain of 3,826 acres. Most, if not all, of

this increase can be explained by the loss of acreage from the seagrass

category.

    Wetlands  (600)1

    Wetlands experienced an overall decrease of 22,476 acres, a decline of

93%.  Wet prairies and freshwater marsh lost 7,017 acres, a 97% decline.

Marine wetlands will be discussed in detail in the followinq section.

    Barrenland  (700)1

     Barrenland  increased  by 8%, a gain of 68 acres.   These  lands were

generally the result of land clearing and other construction activities.

    Transportation and Utilities (800)1

    This category increased 341%, from 867 acres to 3,823 acres.  Much of

the  increase  can  be  explained  by  the  addition  of  Interstate  95  and

expansion of West Palm Beach International Airport.   In addition, several

other factors, such as bus terminals and sewage treatment plants, have

increased the acreage value for this category.

1Does not include acreage data from the Riviera Beach quad.

                                   147
<pb n="154" />

VI E 3. FISHERIES HABITAT COMPONENT ACREAGES

    Section  VI  0  3 defines ,fisheries  habitat  components.    Table  110

provides historical and recent acreage values for fisheries habitat in Lake

Worth.   Acreage values for the Riviera Beach quad can be included within

this sectio Olsi nce the i nterpretati on error does not include marine

wetlands.

    Mangroves (612)I

    Mangroves lost 1,881 acres, a decrease of 87%. Mangroves appear to be

replaced by Australian Pines and urbanization in the form of seawalls andI

resi denti al and commerci al housi ng. The remai ni ng 276 acres of mangroves

occur in very small scattered areas and are now protected by strict

regulations.

    Non-Vegetated Tidal Flat (651)1

    Mudflats apparently did not exist either historically or presently

within the Lake Worth study site.

    Oyster Reefs (654)

    Oyster reefs did not exist either historically or presently within the

Lake Worth study site.

    Saltmarshes (642)1

    Only one site of saltmarsh occurred historically within the study

si te, which was located in the Riviera Beach quad. All 130 acres of this

marsh was replaced by residential area and a small lake. Some tropical

                                 148
<pb n="155" />

                Table 10. LAKE WORTH FISHERIES HABITAT COMPONENT ACREAGES

   Habitat Component                        Non-Vegetated
                           Mangrove          Tidal Flat        Oyster Reef         Saltmarsh           Seagrass
                 Year    1940   1975 1940 1975                                      1940 140    975    1940   1975

USGS Quadrangle Name

Riviera Beach             1667    112          0      0           0       0          130     0         1995    152

Palm Beach                  66     46          0      0           0       0           0      0         1014      0

Lake Worth                 424    118          0      0           0       0          130     0         1262      9

       TOTAL ACRES      17552  46909           0      0           0       0         130      0         4271    161

Acreage Change             - 1881                                                      - 130            -4110
Percent (%) Change         -   87%                                                     - 100%           -  96%

                                                        149
<pb n="156" />

hammock also occurred there possibly as a result of natural succession but

more likely a result of residential trees planting.

     Seagrasses  (645  historical;  901,  903,  904  recent)

     Due to the poor quality of photography (for seagrass interpretation)

in the Lake Worth study area, it has been determined that a historical

comparison is of unacceptable accuracy. Because of the long term turbidity

patterns  in  Lake  Worth,  even  the  recent  photography  was  difficult  to

interpret and much of the seagrass delineation was provided to the

contractor  through ground truth efforts and personal  communication.   The

only substantial seagrass bed found in Lake Worth was north of Palm Beach

Inlet adjacent to John MacArther State Recreation Area.  This seagrass bed

consisted of primarily Halodule and Thalassia.   During the ground truth

efforts,  the Thalassia was  found  to be highly reproductive  with  large

accumulations of viable seeds.  This is of important consequence for future

restoration  work  in  the  Lake  Worth  area.

     Some recollective communication with early researchers in the Lake

Worth area has provided some understanding of seagrass populations.   Dr.

Gilbert Voss (personal communication) stated that seagrasses within Lake

Worth  historically  existed  only  near  the  inlets  and  were  never  very

abundant.   In addition,  Dr.  Voss stated that no seagrasses ever existed

within  mid  Lake  Worth;  he  described  this  area  as  a "big  mud  hole."

Seasonal and short term variations most likely occur, however, it is

probable that seagrass populations have remained relatively unchanged over

the  past  40  years.

                                   150
<pb n="157" />

          VI E 4. COMPARISON BETWEEN FISHERIES STATISTICS AND

                   HABITAT ALTERATION

               Since commercial fisheries statistics were inadequate in general and

             grossly inaccurate for the Lake Worth Study site (see Section V E 2), and

             because the acreage values for the seagrass category are questionable,  no

          attempt was made to compare wetland  loss to fisheries  decline.   Observing

          the commercial catch values in 1951 (Fig. 15 through 22), however, shows

          that before regulations were enacted that banned all net fishing other than

              cast nets in Lake Worth, a large commercial fishing industry existed in the

          area. As discussed in Section V E 2, the catch may not have come from Lake

          Worth.   The data presents only the county in which the catch was  landed.

          Much  of  the  catch  may  well  have  come  from  the  Loxahatchee  estuary.

          Unfortunately,  no  data  are  available  to  clarify  this  discrepancy.

               Until fisheries statistics are improved to include effort data and

          knowledge of where the catch was made, no conclusions can be drawn to

              associ ate habitat alteration to fisheries decline.

                          5
<pb n="158" />

152

152
<pb n="159" />

       Marine Resources Geobased Information
                     System
<pb n="160" />

         VII. MARINE RESOURCES GEOBASED INFORMATION SYSTEM

VII A. DESCRIPTION

    A  Marine  Resources  Geobased  Information  System  (MRGIS)  has  been

installed at the Florida Department of Natural Resources Bureau of Marine

Research  (BMR) in St.  Petersburg,  Florida.   The MRGIS is designed  for

processing, analyzing, and integrating satellite data and other digital

data from a grid system with a variety of environmental and socioeconomic

data  for  resource  analyses  and  applications  modeling.   The  MRGIS will

be used primarily as a research tool for coastal  zone resource management

and for integrating coastal  zone data bases.   The system is a research

prototype for the State of Florida and is being used to demonstrate

regional and state-wide applications.

    The MRGIS was developed at the BMR with the following reasoning:

     1. BMR has actively pursued research with satellite imagery since the

        early 1970's and has participated in field experiments with NASA,

        testing  prototype  sensors  and  applications  of  these  sensors.

    2.  Scientists  from  BMR represented  DNR  on the  LANDSAT  Evaluation

        Committee and, thus, the integration of the MRGIS as a prototype

        for a statewide research system was consistent with the intent of

         the committee.

    3.  BMR  had  the  capability  of  assessing  hardware  and  software

         required to develop the MRGIS and was current with the latest

        technology in the field by close association with NASA.

     4.  BMR  Scientists  had  been  trained  on Earth  Resources  Laboratory

        Applications System (ELAS) software and were computer-oriented.

                                   153
<pb n="161" />

        This permitted the purchase, installation, and use of the system

        without additional staffing.

    5.  Habitat loss is of critical  concern to the State of Florida andI

        the MRGIS provides an exemplary too] to establish a digital

        data base for coastal habitats.

    Since the MRGIS was the prototype for a State of Florida research

system, extreme caution was required in hardware configuration.  With the

assistance of NASA Earth Resource Laboratory personnel, specific hardware

configurations to meet general budgetary constraints were developed.    At

that  time bid  specifications  were  developed.   Si nce the i ntent was  toI

establish a turnkey system that would use ELAS as the operating software, a

major requirement to the vendor was the installation of ELAS on the model

they bid.   In addition,  specific hardware requirements to ensure expand-

ability and state of the art technology were included to maintain the

potential  for  future  systems  development.I

    The image processor and display was purchased as a sole source item

because the software driver and interface to the mainframe were available

and ELAS was designed with I/O commands specific to the processor.   Soft-

ware and hardware development would have been necessary if any other

approach  had  been  taken.

    The mainframe hardware (Fig. 27) consists of a 512 kilobyte core

memory and peripheral storage and retrieval devices.  The image processingI

system (Fig. 28) is interfaced to the mainframe and is capable of image and

graphics  display.   The system configuration was  designed  by NASA Earth

Resources Laboratory (ERL) to satisfy requirements of the Earth Resources

Laboratory Applications Software (ELAS).

                                  154
<pb n="162" />

               32/27         3510         3025         3025
              CENTRAL     FLOATING      MEMORY        MEMORY
             PROCESSING  APOINT         MODULE        MODULE
                 UNIT      ACCELERATOR
                                  SELBUS
9203            8000          9131                                         9020-
CRT          INPUT/OUTPUT    HIGH                                         LSTP
    CR T       PROCESSOR   SPEED DATA                                I
                            INTERFACE

                           I SEE FIG.                               I

                                MPBUS                               I
                      8030                       8oo                I      9
                   CONTROLLER IjCONTROLLER      8 LINE                  TA
                      LPFDC      I IOPDC         ASYNC  TAPE DRIV
                                                  8580           o          IPS
                                     I         I   DP                   800/1600
                            t    8310  GRS232
                    '8310
                    300 LPM    I
                   PRINTER    I DISK DRIVE                               MODEL
                    W/8317         300 MB        9 2 03                   9568
                                  IREMOVABL  I    CRT               L     _

                               I MODEL I
                               L   8144

                         Figure 27. MRGIS mainframe and peripheral hardware.

                                              155
<pb n="163" />

            GOULD SELBUS
                9131
          HIGH SPEED DATA
             INTERFACE
                HSD

               COMTAL
              CONT- I 3
             INTERFACE

                                                            IMAGE RESOURCES VIDEOPRINT
   3M COMTAL                       CT-8H                             MODEL 5300
   8000-30SER                    512 x 512                       4 x 5 INSTA PRINT
IMAGE PROCESSOR               HIGH RESOLUTION                             OR
                               COLOR MONITOR                       35 MM EXPOSURE
3 REFRESH MEMORY                19" DIAGONAL                      HARDCOPY OUTPUT

                       |TRACK BALL
                       LCONTROL LER

                          Figure 28. MRGIS graphics hardware.

                                         156

---- C3 --                     ---                             ---                            -
<pb n="164" />

    The  software  (Fig.  29)  installed  on  the  MRGIS  consists  of  three

levels:

    I  1.  System Software - machine-specific operating software for primary

         level communication.

    2. FORTRAN, Symbolic Debugger, Scientific Run Time Library - Proqram-

         ing language and programing aids.

     3. Application Software - ELAS, Coastal Zone Color Scanner, and any

         other level two programs.

    The principal applications software installed on the system is ELAS.

This software was sponsored and developed by the Earth Resources Labora-

tory (ERL) of the National Space Technology Laboratories (NSTL) of the

National  Aeronautics  and  Space  Administration  (NASA).    ELAS  software

development  began  in the  early  1970's.   The initial  work was  directed

towards supervised classification of LANDSAT and aircraft data.   Develop-

ment  progressed  with  the  addition  of  the  capability  to  geographically

reference the data to the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) grid.  Also,

the data processing approach was changed from batch to interactive process-

ing.  A data base program was added to allow the storage of numerous para-

meters, (i.e.) LANDSAT classifications, soil types, rainfall, elevation,

per-cent slope, slope length, aspect, ownership,  oceanographic variables,

etc.,  by  a selectable  cell  size.   This  permits  manipulation  of  these

parameters through selectable application algorithms to produce resource

management  information.

     The ELAS software is divided into two components, the operatino sub-

system and the applications modules.   The operating subsystem is FORTRAN-

based and uses some machine-dependent routines for INPUT/OUTPUT and control

functions.

                                    157
<pb n="165" />

          GOULD SYSTEMS
              MPX 32
        OPERATING SYSTEMS

                                       PROGRAMMING SUPPORT
                                              SOFTWARE

                                            FORTRAN  77+
                                        SYMBOLIC  DEBUGGER
                                       SCTIENTIFIC  RUNTIME
                                               LIBRARY

                                                                    FISHERIES STATISTICS
                                                                    SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT

EARTH RESOURCES LABORATORY APPLICATIONS

                 SOFTWARE

            COASTAL ZONE COLOR
               SCANNER IMAGERY
             ANALYSIS SOFTWARE

                      Figure 29. HRGIS software configuration.

                                    158
<pb n="166" />

    The applications modules are written in FORTRAN, utilizing the operat-

ing subsystem for the machine dependent functions.  The application modules

exist  generally  as FORTRAN  overlays  or subroutines.   Depending an the

application, needed modules are called or released by the operating sub-

system.   Approximately 133 processing modules now exist within the ELAS

package. A complete description of ELAS is documented by  Junkin et al.

(1980).

     The  usefulness  of  information  derived  from  LANDSAT  multispectral

scanner data has been recognized by state agencies primarily as a result of

the Florida LANDSAT Demonstration Project (Brannan et al. 1981). That pro-

ject was developed in conjunction with the NASA Earth Resources Laboratory

Regional  Applications  Program  and  the  Florida  LANOSAT  Evaluation

Committee.

VII  B.   LANDSAT  IMAGERY  ANALYSIS  OF  CHARLOTTE  HARBOR

     General LANDSAT vegetation cover classifications have been developed

for  the  Charlotte  Harbor  area.    Development  of these  classifications

represents the initial phase of the MRGIS operational development.  These

initial classifications are at Level I/Level II resolutions and stati sti -

cal accuracies of the classifications have not yet been developed.  As we

gain better familiarity with ELAS, it is certain that classifications will

be greatly enhanced and specific analysis techniques relative to the infor-

mation  desired  will  be refined.   A stepwise progression  to provide  a

general understanding of the process in developing these classifications,

including observations and comments for this report, follows:

                                    159
<pb n="167" />

     1.  LANDSAT:  When utilizing LANDSAT data it is important to under-

stand  physical  processes of data acquisition.   The LANDSAT program was

initiated in 1972 and data are available from 1972 to the present.   This

report utilizes data collected by the multispectral scanner (MSS) located

on board all four LANDSAT satellites launched since 1972.  The satellites

were launched into a polar sun-synchronous orbit at an altitude of 920km

and pass over a given area every 18 days.  The MSS has a ground resolution

of one pixel (equal to 80m2 or 1.1 acres) and measures average reflectence

of the pixel in four wavelength bands (0.5-0.6, 0.6-0.7, 0.7-0.8 and

0.8-1.1  nanometers).   Each  LANDSAT  scene  (fixed  image) covers  an  area

approximately  183 x 183km  (115 x 115 statute miles).          These data are

relayed to earth stations and radiometric and geometric corrections are

made by computer.  The raw data, in several forms, are then available for

purchase (currently through NOAA) as computer compatible tapes.  LANDSAT 4

contains the MSS and a new Thematic Mapper (TM) sensor with coverage every

16 days and a lower orbit.  The TM measures seven wavelength bands and has

a ground resolution of 1/4 acre. These data are not yet available. One TM

scene  has  been  installed  on  the  MRGIS  and  initial  review  suggests  a

tremendous increase in the ability to resolve fisheries habitat.  TM data

will be compared to MSS and aerial photography in detail in subsequent

reports.

     2.   Acquiring data:   Data are ordered on computer compatible tapes

from data centers  located  in several  cities  across  the U.S.   Prior to

ordering a scene it is important to know the percent cloud cover over the

area of interest. Usually, the best imagery has less than 20% cloud cover.

In addition, the type of information to be extracted from the data should

                                   160
<pb n="168" />

              be considered before or dering data.  If, for example, the prime interest is

           seagrasses, late fall to early spring (when the water is clearer) at low

          tides provides the best data. 'If the interest is in deciduous forests then

           a multitemporal analysis from summer (when leaves are present) and winter

           (when  leaves  are  absent)  would  provide  the  best  data  sources.    It is

             advised  that  the  scene  be  personally  scrutenized  through  microfiche  or

           hardcopy prior to purchase.

                3.  Processing:   Raw computer compatible tape (CCT) imagery consists
           of four data channels  for each scene.   The data consist  of a numerical

           value between 0 and 255 representing an average relative reflectance value

           for  each  of  the  four  spectral  bands  of  each  pixel.    The  raw  data,

           therefore, can potentially contain four of (256)4 possible values for each

              pi xel.    ELAS contai ns numerous stati sti cal packages which can be used to

           transform the raw data into a managable data set, a necessary step in

           developing a vegetative and land use classification.   By usi ng one or two

           of the statistical classifiers, less than 62 classes will be developed

           based upon the statistical  boundaries  set by the investigator.    At this

              point, the investigator evaluates the classes broken out by the processing

           techniques and assigns them a land cover type such as mangroves, pines or

           hardwoods.  During this interactive process, some classes may be lumped and
           others may be further statistically evaluated.

                4.  Charlotte Harbor:   The Charlotte Harbor study area required two

           scenes  of  data,  Upper  and  Lower  Charlotte  Harbor  (Fig.  30  and  31).

                Upper Charlotte Harbor (Fig. 30) was developed from an August 22, 1980

              scene.  Originally, 54 classes were developed for this image, however, they

              have  been  combined  to  present  nine  final  classes  and  are  defined  as
           follows:

         3                                                       161
<pb n="169" />

Impacted/Cleared refers primarily to areas undergoing development.

The land has been cleared and has very little vegetation.  The primary

component of the soil is sand and the reflectence values are high.

Some  naturally  occurring  saltbarrens  may  be  found  within  this

category.

Impacted/Urban  are areas which  are composed  primarily of buildings

such as downtown areas or dense suburban areas, or any recent housing

developments with little vegetation.

Impacted/Vegetated are areas comprised primarily of cleared land which

has  revegetated  and  exists  in various  stages  of succession.   The

majority of lands in this class were cleared, platted and installed

with roads during the 1960's - 1970's land boom period.   This class

also includes crop and pasture land and housing developments that are

typically older and lushly vegetated.

The  Palmetto  Scrub/Pine  Scrub/Tropicals  refers  to  the  predominant

natural  vegetation types  in a particular  scene.   Palmetto  and pine

scrub contain from 0-30% pine with palmetto the predominant vegeta-

tion.    These  areas  are  typically  on  high  ground  that  is rarely

flooded.     Tropical   vegetation   (generally  non-native  introduced

species) were lumped into this class and consists of very small areas.

The type of tropicals included are primarily woody tree species such

as  eucalyptus  and  members  of  the  fig  family.

Palmetto/Marsh/Mangrove classes were combined to present a subarborial

vegetation which is either seasonally or tidally wet.  This refers to

vegetation types less than 3m in height.   The palmetto areas in this

class have &lt;30% pine and are seasonally wet with a high water table.

                               162
<pb n="170" />

0;&gt;00-40       --' ----  a,- V:4f' 4- f  f -                 Sf---

00,      000 00    ."  ,g}6 ......  a   s*,
      lO                                   T PM  p *54z"

  Figure 30 GeneralLANDSAT cassificaion of Uper Charltte HarbI SE
        _Ii                 i    w l

  Figure 30.  General  LANDSAT classification of Upper Charlotte Harbor.
<pb n="171" />

- - -- -- - - -- - - - ---- I -    -

                                        0             0

        Figure 31. General LArND$AT classification of Lower Charlotte Ha'bor.
                                            r:" '""- "| - -.

                 Figure l1 *eea LADA clsiiaino oe hrot abr
<pb n="172" />

    The marsh  areas  consist  of  Juncus,  Spartina  and  other  fresh  and

    brackish water  species.   The mangroves  included  in this  class  are

    generally  stunted  and  sparse.    Batis,  Salicornia  and  other  salt-

    tolerant species coinhabit these areas.

    The Mangrove/Pine/Hardwood class is also characterized by seasonal

    or tidal  inundation.   This vegetation  class  typically has  a dense

    canopy and is &gt;3 m in height.   The mangroves are typically so dense

    that little water is reflected through the canopy.   The pine areas

    have a 30-60% canopy cover and usually have an understory of palmetto.

    These pine flatwoods are seasonally wet although the pines individu-

    ally inhabit the higher ground.  The deciduous hardwoods inhabit pri-

    marily bottom lands associated with the rivers and their tributaries

    that  comprise the Charlotte Harbor watershed.   These hardwoods  are

    generally composed of cypress, sweetgum, oaks, bays, and others.

    The Shallow/Turbid Water class represents those waters usually &lt;3m in

    depth  and  either  have  a bottom  reflectance  or  are  turbid.

    Deep Water refers to those waters &gt;3m and are less influenced by

    bottom  reflectance.

    Figure  32,  entitled  Punta  Gorda  SW,  is  a section  of  the  Upper

Charlotte  Harbor  satellite  image.   This  imaqe has  been  corrected  from

spacecraft  coordinates  to  Universal   Transverse  Meridian   (UTM)  grid

coordinates.   The conversion  results in a north-south orientation of the

image, comparable to available aerial photography and map products.  Figure

30  covers  the  same  area  as  a quad  map  (7.5  x 7.5 minutes)  and  is,

therefore, compatible to the photointerpretation of the Punta Gorda SW

quad.   A seperate set of statistics was developed for this image with 50

                                   167
<pb n="173" />

original land cover classes.  Again, many of the classes were combined, but

in this case the final classification is more specific in vegetation type.

In addition to land cover classes,  several  Indian mounds and bald eagle

nesting  sites  have  been  integrated  into  this  image.

    The first two classes are identical to the Upper Charlotte Harbor

classification  description.    There  are  no  urban  areas  in  this  image.

     Palmetto Scrub refers to those areas with &lt;30% pine and a palmetto

     understory.   These  areas  range  from 90% palmetto  to a mixture  of

     palmetto, xeric grasses, wax myrtle, and other subarboreal vegetation.

     Pine scrub consists of &gt;30% pine and generally has a palmetto under-

     story.

     Fresh/Brackish Marsh consists primarily of Juncus, Spartina and Typha

     in areas of low salinity. Also included in this class are large sites

     of Batis  and Salicornia.   These  areas were typically found  in the

     center of mangrove islands or in supratidal areas with dead or stunted

     and  sparse  mangroves.

     Mangrove Predominant contains red, black and white mangroves.   Quite

     often man-impacted mangroves were interspersed with Brazilian pepper.

     Vegetated Saltern or Tidal Flats primarily refers to the fringe areas

     separating mangroves from palmetto and pine scrub habitats.   Vegeta-

     tion  on  these  flats  is patchy in nature  and consists  of grasses,

     palmetto, mangroves  and  succulents  tolerant to extreme wet  and dry

     periods.   The barren areas are both organic and inorganic in nature.

     Lower  Charlotte  Harbor  (Fig.  31)  represents  a  December  8,  1980

     scene.   Originally, 43 classes were developed for the image but have

     been combined to a final 10 classes.

                                    168
<pb n="174" />

                                 Figure 32. Detailed LANDSAT classification of the Punta Gorea SW quad.

Figure 32. Detailed LANDSAT classification of the Punta Gorta SW quad.
<pb n="175" />

    The classification  scheme for this image is comparable to the Upper

Charlotte Harbor image with one exception.   Since this was a winter scene,

the water was clear and submerged seagrasses were statistically separable

The two seagrass classes represent moderate or dense meadows versus sparse

or patchy meadows.

    The above classifications (Fig. 30-32) are initial work products and

represent a stage in the development  of the MRGIS.  The Charlotte Harbor

area is being used as a training exercise to demonstrate the potential of

the MRGIS.   Aerial  photographs  and associated digitized photointerpreta-

tions are being used to develop an accuracy assessment and comparison of

the aerials and LANDSAT images.   The Punta Gorda SW image  (Fig.  32) has

been analyzed and ground truthed for comparison to the Punta Gorda SW

digitized quad map (Map 7).  Although the statistics for the image may not

yet be the best for all the classes, a comparison of mangrove acreages has

been made.   The image contains 8,486 acres of mangroves while the photo-

interpreted  quad  contains  8,251 acres.   This  demonstrates  a very close

agreement  but  can  be misleading.    For  example,  while  the  geographical

locations of the mangroves are very similar, some areas on the image that

depict mangrove are not found on the photointerpreted quad and vice-versa.

     These differences are being addressed in a detailed, and eventually a

statistical, manner which will  allow us to proceed to other areas of the

state with a developed level of accuracy.

VII  C.    ADDITIONAL  USES  OF  THE  MRGIS

     The MRGIS is now being utilized in several  other areas of research.

     1.  Coastal Zone Color Scanner (CZCS):  In conjunction with the Gulf

                                   171
<pb n="176" />

States Marine Fisheries Commission SEAMAP program, we have installed

additional software into ELAS capable of analyzing imagery from the CZCS on

board the Nimbus 7 satellite.'  The software was provided by the National

Marine Fisheries Service and is used to measure chlorophyll concentrations

and turbidity in coastal  and ocean waters.   CZCS data will be analyzed in

conjunction with ichthyoplankton surveys being made on the west Florida

Shelf.  This will aid in determining larval fish distribution and recruit-

ment.  We will be developing a CZCS analysis program to research migration

patterns of pelagic/coastal species such as mackerel.  We will be cooperat-

ing with University of Miami personnel in using CZCS imagery in conjunction

with swordfish research.

    The BMR has been using CZCS imagery in Red Tide research and this will

continue.   With the CZCS capability now operating on the MRGIS, numerous

other requests and discussion from state, university and federal organiza-

tions have been enacted and it is assured the CZCS will greatly enhance our

understanding  of  the  coastal  environment.

2.  LANDSAT:   The DNR Bureau of Aquatic Plants is currently working with

the MRGIS to assess its use in monitoring the spread of aquatic weeds in

Florida.

     We are working with the DNR Bureau of Environmental Land Management to

inventory Florida's aquatic preserves.

    We will also be working with Rookery Bay National Estuarine Sanctuary

to provide an inventory of the sanctuary and the surrounding areas.

     LANDSAT can also be applied to red tide research.   The dinoflagellate

Ptychodiscus brevis is responsible for massive fish kills and neurotoxic

shellfish poisoning.   Figure 30 is the first LANDSAT image to document  a

                                   172
<pb n="177" />

Florida  west  coast  toxic  dinoflagellate  bloom  and  possibly  the  first

LANDSAT image, world wide, to ever document a toxic dinoflagellate bloom.

This type of imagery can provide the scientific investigator and resource

manager with information pertinent to the development and dynamics of a

bloom  simply  unattainable  by  conventional  shipboard  measurements.

     As visiting scientists and resource managers are introduced to the

technology of the MRGIS, immediate applications are conceived.   This is a

relatively  new  technology  that  has  not  been  adequately  transferred  to

scientists  and/or  resource  managers.    The  MRGIS  is  bridging  the  gap.

VIID.    GROUND  TRUTHING

     Ground  truthing started  in August  1982 and will  continue for this

phase of the project through early 1984.   Initial ground truthing served

two  major  purposes  and  currently  serves  two  additional  intentions.

Initial ground truthing efforts:

     1.  DNR personnel assisted DOT in verifying their photointerpretation

         of Charlotte Harbor  aerial  photography.   This involved visiting

         specific sites in question by the interpretors and identifying the

         vegetation.    Representative  areas  of numerous  vegetation  types

         were visited,  including coastal  habitats  such as seagrasses  and

         mangroves.

     2.  DNR personnel,  assisted by a DER staff member and the Lee County

         Marine Extension Agent, ground truthed several seagrass areas to

         verify  DOT's  system  of  classifying  seagrasses.   The  original

         classification  delineated  four  categories:    sparse,  moderate,

                                    173
<pb n="178" />

        dense,  and  patchy.    Ten  transects  were  assessed  for  spatial

        distribution of seagrasses.  These initial observations suggested

        that the classification system be altered to three designates:

        sparse,  moderate-dense,  and  patchy.

Current  ground  truthing  efforts:

     1.  When using remotely-sensed imagery it is important to understand

        seasonal density changes in vegetation resulting from leaf drop

         and leaf growth  to allow multitemporal  analysis.   Five of ten

        original preliminary transect sites were chosen for quarterly

         investigations of seagrass density over one year.

         Each sampling period and station requires measurements of several

         parameters.    Currently,  measurements  are  taken  only  for  the

         dominant seagrass, Thalassia testudinum.  (1) Seagrass density is

         determined by counting the number of short shoots per 1/16 meter

         quadrats.    An  average  value  is  calculated  and  extrapolated

         resulting with  an average value per  square meter.   (2) Random

         seagrass short shoots are measured to determine number of blades

         and blade length and width.   (3) Water temperature  and salinity

         are recorded. (4) If drift algae is present, random samples using

         the 1/16m quadrat are taken.   The algae is dried and an average

         dry  weight  per  square  meter  is  determined.

         A similar  study will  proceed  for the Tampa Bay study (CM 69).

         Data  from Charlotte  Harbor  and Tampa  Bay will  be analyzed  to

         determine a method to seasonally assess seagrasses using remote

         sensing  techniques.

     2. Statistical analyses of Landsat images sometimes delineate certain

                                    174
<pb n="179" />

                  areas as being different from sites that are actually of the same

                  classification. Conversely, analyses also classify very different

                  areas  as  being  the  same.      Ground  truthing may  clarify  these

                       questionable  sites.   These preliminary observations will greatly
                       facilitate future analyses involving Landsat images of other sites

                  of  coastal  Florida.

                       7
<pb n="180" />

                                   I.
176
<pb n="181" />

                     Appendices

                    Glossary

*                   Literaturature Cited

                      BG.GDG       IIGOD          IG
<pb n="182" />

                           VIII. APPENDICES

VIII A. Appendix A

      The following is a general description of the classification scheme

used on the map products.   It is reproduced from Kuyper et al.  (1981).

                                   177
<pb n="183" />

                            SECTION I

General Description                                                                The definitions which follow will  provide  understanding  of
                                                                         what  is  included in each category at Levels I, II and III.  The
    This land use, vegetation cover and land form  classification             definitions are largely based on U.S.G.S publications  referenced
system  is  arranged  in  hierarchical  levels  with  each  level              in this report.
containing land information of increasing specificity.

LEVEL I

    This class of data is very general  in  nature.   It  can  be
obtained  from remote sensing satellite imagery with supplemental
information.  Level I would  normally  be  used  for  very  large
areas,  statewide  or  larger,  mapped  typically  at  a scale of
1:1,000,000 or 1:500,000.  At these scales, one  inch  equals  16
miles  or  one  inch  equals  eight  miles,  (1  centimeter per S
kilometer), respectively.

LEVEL II

    This class of data is more specific than Level I.   Level  II
data  is  normally obtained from high altitude imagery (40,000 to
60,000  feet),  supplemented  by  satellite  imagery  and   other
materials  such  as topographic maps.  Mapping typically might be
at a scale  of  1:100,000  or  one  inch  equals  8,333  feet  (1
centir-eter per 1 kilometer).

LEVEL III

    This  class  of data usually is obtained from medium altitude
photography flown between 10,00C and 40,000  feet.   The  mapping
scale  typically  is  1:24,000,  or one inch equals 2,000 feet (1
centimeter per 0.24 kilometer).

LEVEL IV

    This more  specific  class  of  data  is  obtained  from  low
altitude  photography  flown  below  10,000  feet.  In comparison
with the above mentioned levels,  Level  IV  typically  might  be
mapped  at  a  scale  of  1:6000,  or one inch equals 500 feet (1
centireter per 0.06 kilometer).

Scope and Use

    The Florida Land Use,  Cover  and  Land  Form  Classification
System   is  an  important  step  toward  the  development  of  a
geographic data based information system.  It serves to reduce  a
large  amount  of prirmary data (such as remote sensing imagery or
field survey records) to a more  understandable,  smaller  amount
of  secondary  data  (such  as  a land use map).  The system also
provides a useful  structure  of  land  concepts  of  properties.
Yet, it  does  not  collect  or  analyze  inferration  or  offer
conclusions.

                                                                     178
<pb n="184" />

                       100 URPAN OR BUILT-UP                                      residential units may be found on military bases in the  form  of
                                                                                barracks,  apartments,  dormitories  or homes; and on college and
    Urban  or  Built-up  land consists of areas of intensive use,                  university campuses, in the form of  apartments  and  dormitories
with much of the land covered by structures.   Included  in  this                   in  close  proximity  to  instructional  buildings.  Agricultural
category  are  cities,  towns, villages, strip developments along                   field  operations  and   resort   facilities   commonly   provide
highways, and such areas as those  occupied  by  mills,  shopping                   temporary  lodging  for  their employees and these areas would be
centers,  industrial  and  commercial complexes, and institutions                  classified under Agriculture, and Commercial and Services respec-
that may, in some instances, be isolated from urban areas.                         tively.

    As developrment progresses,  small  blocks  of  land  of  less                 110       Residential, Low Density (less than two dwelling
intensive  or  nonconforming  use ray be isolated in the midst of                            units per acre]
built-up areas and will generally be included in  this  category.
Agricultural,  forest,  or water areas on the fringe of urban and                             111  Single Family Units
built-up areas will not be included except where  they  are  part
of low-density urban development.                                                            112  Mobile Home Units

    The  Urban  or Built-up category takes precedence over others                            113  Mixed Units
when the criteria for  more  than  one  category  are  met.   For
example,  residential  areas  that  have sufficient tree cover to                             119  Low Density, Under Construction
meet Forestland Upland  criteria  will  still  be  classified  as
Residential in the Urban or Built-up category.                                      120      Residential, Medium Density [two-five dwelling
                                                                                          units per acre]
110      Residential
                                                                                          121 Single Family Unit
         Residential  land  uses  range  from  high-density urban
housing to low-density areas with relatively few  dwelling  units                             122  Mobile Home Units
per  gross  acre.   The  variation  extends from the multi-family
apartments generally found  in  larger  urban  centers  to  those                             123  Mixed Units [fixed and mobile home units]  *Note 1
single-family  houses sometimes having lot sizes of more than one
acre.                                                                                        129  Medium Density, Under Construction

         Areas of sparse residential  land  use  (generally  less                  130       Residential, High Density
than  one dwelling unit per five acres), such as farmsteads, will
be included in other categories to which they  relate.   However,                             131  Single  Unit  [six  and  over  dwelling  units  per
rural  residential  and  recreational  type  subdivisions will be                                  acrel
included in the Residential category since  the  land  is  almost
totally  committed  to  residential  use, even though it may have                            132  Mobile Home Units [more  than  six  dwelling  units
forest or range types.                                                                             per acre]

         In most instances the boundary will be  clear  when  new                            133  Multiple  Dwelling  Units, Low Rise [two stories or
housing  developments  abut  clearly  defined agricultural areas.                                  lessl
conversly, the residential boundary may be  vague  and  difficult
to  discern  when  residential development is sporadic and occurs                             134  Multiple Dwelling Units, High Rise  [three  stories
in smaller isolated units, develeped over an extended  Feriod  of                                  or more]
time  in  areas  with  rixed  or  less intensive uses.  A careful
evaluation of density and the overall relationship  of  the  area                            135  Mixed Units [fixed and mobile home units]   Note 1
to the total urLan cromplex must bhe made.
                                                                                          139  High Density, Under Construction
         Oter  land  use  cteg-cries ray ermrace areas that meet
the Residential category  recu:rrent.   Often  Fuch  residential                    1 4      Commercial and Services
sections  are  an  integral  rc .ent of the cat'gory with which
     they       ..    ae as s    E      tociatedC  an  t; l   b e  inoe   wthi thath
.th.v  are  assoc;dted  and  'hou ld  be   incl u e d   within   th.at                      Commercial  areas  are  predoirinantly connected with the
ca tmguory.    For   exam: Ile,   inr  the   Init tutionalI category,              sale of products and services.  This category is  composed  of  a

                                                                        179
<pb n="185" />

large ,number  of  individual types of commercial land use, often                 145       Tourist Services
occurring as a complex mixture of uses.
                                                                                        This  category includes all those facilities that can be
         The Commercial and Services category includes  the  main                identified in support of a motel and hotel facility.
building  plus  secondary  structures and integral areas assigned
to support  the  base  unit.   Included  are  sheds,  warehouses,                 146       Oil and  Gas  Storage  [except  those  areas  associated
office buildings, driveways, parking lots, and landscaped areas.                            with industrial use or manufacturing]

         Other   types   of  commercial  areas  include  shopping                          This  category identifies storage facilities used in the
centers and commercial  strip  developments.   These  areas  have                 retail and wholesale sales of these specific products.  The  Port
distinctive  patterns  and  are easily identifiable.  Frequently,                 Everglades  facility  in  Fort  Lauderdale  would  be  a  typical
individual  houses  and  other  urban  uses  may  be   found   in                 example.
commercial  areas.   These  uses  are not delineated, unless they
cannot be plotted into categorized cell  size  of  at  least  one                 147       Mixed Commercial and Service                        *Note 1
acre  at  Level  III,  in  .hich case the Mixed category should be
used.                                                                             148       Cemeteries

         Another commercial use that is not  easily  identifiable                149       Commercial or Service Under Construction
is  the commercial resort.  These businesses cater to vacationing
patrons and contain associated recreational  facilities  such  as                 150       Industrial
swimming pools and ball courts.
                                                                                        The Industrial category embraces those land uses where
141      Retail Sales and Services                                                manufacturing,    assembly,   or   processing   of   products   is
                                                                               accomplished.   Industrial  areas  include  a   wide   array   of
         The  area  of  Retail  Sales  and  Service  is primarily                industrial  types ranging from light manufacturing and industrial
devoted to sale of products  and  the  services.   This  category                 parks to heavy manufacturing  plants.    Included  are  facilities
will  be  comprised  of  elements  of central business districts,                 for   administration   and   research,    assembly,   storage  and
shopping  centers,  and   office   buildings,   with   associated                 warehousing, shipping, and associated parking lots and grounds.
buildings, driveways and parking lots, etc.
                                                                                        Typical examples of industrial types found in Florida
142      Wholesale   Sales   and   Service   [except  warehousing                 are  pulp,  or  lumber  mills,  oil  refineries  with tank farms,
          associated with industrial use]                                         chemical  plants  and  brickmaking  plants.   Stockpiles  of  raw
                                                                               materials,   larger  power  sources,  and  solid  waste  products
          This element represents primarily structures  identified                disposal areas are visible industrial categories and  are  easily
by  size, shape, and adjacent features.  Normally, structures are                 identified on conventional aerial photography.
large and of boxlike shape, designed to hold large quantities of
products.   Included in this category are open storage areas that                 151       Food Processing
can be identified as being in use or the result  of  supplemental
data to support this classification.                                                        Citrus  processing plants, sugar refineries, and seafood
                                                                               packaging plants are typical of this category.
143      Professional Services
                                                                               152      Timber Processing
          This  category  is unique:  associated elements with the
pri:.e structure, along with  supplemental  data,  are  the  major                          Plywood manufacturing, woodchip plants,  and  saw  mills
keys  to  category  identification and location.  The typical use                 are the prime components in this category.
would be lawyers, doctors, consulting firms, etc.
                                                                               153      Mineral Processing
144      Cultural and Entertainment
                                                                                        Refining  of  basic  earth  materials  such  as  Koalin,
          This  category  includes  theatres,  museums,  open  air                phosphates,  heavy  metals   (Titanium,  Zircon  concentrates)  is
theatres  (such  as  rotion  pictures  and  those  for theatrical                 accomplished  in  Florida and the facilities for processing these
performances).  Pecreational facilities  such  as  skating  rinks                 materials are located near the mining operations.
and tennis courts are not included in this category.

                                                                      180
<pb n="186" />

154      Oil and Gas Processing                                                    161       Strip Mines

         This  category  includes   production   of   jet   fuel,                           The mining  method  used  in  this  category  is  easily
processing  and  recycling  used  petroleum  products, also other                  identified  by  its  land scarring, either in pit form or in Iona
products such as  asphalt  and  liquid  gases,  as  well  as  the                  trenches, with tailings along the trenching operation.
classic petroleum product, gasoline.
                                                                               162       Sand and Gravel Pits
155       Other Light Industrial
                                                                                         The category of Sand and Gravel Pits will be relatively
         Steel  fabrication, small boat manufacturing, electronic                 small  in area size when compared to the category of strip mining
manufacturing and assembly  plants  are  typical  light  industry                  operations.    These  pits   are   used   primarily   to   support
facilities.                                                                        construction activities.

156       Other Heavy Industrial                                                   163       Rock Quarries

         Major  ship  repair,  ship  building,  and  large lumber                           This  category  identifies  the  excavation  of building
mills can be placed in this category.  In some instances  mineral                  materials that can  be  found  in  part  in  the  St.  Augustine,
extraction   can  also  be  assigned  here  if  the  facility  is            B      rooksville   and  Ft.  Myers  areas.   Equipment  used  in  this
processing a final and finished product.                                           category is the major identifying feature.

159       Industrial Under Construction                                            164       Oil and Gas Fields

160       Extractive                                                                         These are petroleum products sources and  are  found  in
                                                                               the  Sunnyland and Jay areas.  No processing facilities are found
         Extractive lands encompass both surface  and  subsurface                 near these fields.  The primary distinguishing  feature  will  be
mining  operations.    Included  are  sand,  gravel and clay pits,                 the  well head sites, some pumping facilities, and small storage
phosphate mines, limestone quarries,  plus  oil  and  gas  wells.                  tank facilities.
The  recognition of these activities on the landscape varies from
the unmistakable giant pit mines  covering  vast  areas,  to  oil                  165       Abandoned mine and Fields
wells  which  cover  only  a few square feet.  Obviously, uniform
identification of all these diverse extractive  uses  with  their                  166       Reclaimed Land
varied  degrees of photographic expression is extremely difficult
from remote sensing data alone.  Industrial complexes, where  the                            This  category  primarily  identifies  phosphate  mining
extracted  material  is  refined, packaged, or further processed,                  areas that are being restored.
are included in this category.
                                                                               167       Holding Ponds
         Abandoned or inactive mining operations are a part of
the  Extractive category until revegetation occurs.  Flooded pits                  170       Institutional
and quarries, which may be part of a mining  operation,  will  be
included in this category.                                                                   Educational,   religious,  health and military facilities
                                                                               are typical components  of  this  category.    Included  within  a
         The  presence  of water bodies does not necessarily mean                 particular  institutional  unit  are  all  buildings, grounds and
inactive or unused extractive areas.  Ponds or  lakes  are  often                  parking  lots  that  compose  the  facility.    Those  areas   not
                                                  parkAreas of tailings         specifically  related  to  the purposes of the institution should
an  integral part of an extractive operation.Araofting
and abar.doned pits and quarries way  r era in  recoulzable  for  a                be excluded.   For example, agricultural  areas  not  specifically
long   time.   These  areas  ray  be  barren  for  decades  after                  associated     with   correctional,    educational    or   religious
deposition.   During the  interval  from  discontinued  use  until                 institutions  are  placed   in   the   appropriate   agricultural
revegetation   occurs,    the  parcel  will  he  retained  in  the                 categories.
Extractive catecory.
                                                                                         Educational   institutions encompass all levels of public
                                                                               and private schools, colleges,  universities,   training  centers,
                                                                               etc.    The   entire  areas  of  buildings,   campus  open  space,
                                                                               dormitories, recreational facilities  and  parking  are  included
                                                                               when identifiable.

                                                                       181
<pb n="187" />

         military  facilities  have  a wide variety of conditions                180      Recreational
including training camps, missile  sites,  etc.   Administration,
storage,   repair,   security   and   other  functional  military                          Recreational  areas  are  those  areas  whose   phys icalI
buildings, plus the practice  ranges,  storage  areas,  equipment                structure  indicates  that  active user-oriented recreation is or
stcrage  lots and buffer zones compose the institutional military                could  be  occurring  within  the  given  physical  area.    This
facilities.   Aux ilIiary  land  uses,  particularly   residential,              category  would include golf courses, parks, swimming beaches and
commercial,  and  other  supporting  uses  located  on a military                shores, marinas, fairgrounds, etc.  (Note:  Swimming beaches  are
base, are included in the Institutional category.                                 identifiable  by  such  features  as  bath  houses, picnic areas,
                                                                               service stands and large parking lots adjacent to the beach
171      Educational Facilities                                                  areas).   In  order  to  make  this  recreational  determination,
                                                                               supplemental information may be required.
         This category includes all facilities, such  as  parking
lots,  stadiums, all buildings and any other features that can be                181       Swimming Beach
related to the facility.
                                                                               182      Golf Courses

                   172  Religious                                                                 183  Race Tracks [horse, dog, car, motorcycle)

         All buildings that can be related to this category are
included.   many  religious  facilities have schools and day care                184       marinas and Fish Camps
centers within their prcperty.                                                    8PakZo

173      military
                                                                               186      Community Recreational Facilities
         All buildings and grounds that compose the facility are
included,   along   with   auxiliary   land   uses,  particularly                18 7      Stadiums   [Those facilities  not  associated  with  high
residential services and other supporting land uses.                                       schools, colleges or universities.]

174      Medical and Health Care                                                 188       Historical Sites [Prehistoric or historic)

         All buildings and grounds that con-pose the facility  are               189      Other  Recreational  [riding  stables,  go-cart  tracks,
included.                                                                                  skeet ranges, etc.]

175      Governmental                                                            190       Open Land

         identifiable  buildings and facilities are included, and                         This includes undeveloped land within urban  areas,  and
supplemental data is used to identify this category.                             inactive  land with street patterns but without structures.  Open
                                                                               Land normally does not exhibit any structures or any indication
176      correctional                                                            of  intended  use.   Often,  urban  inactive  land  may  be  in a
                                                                               transitional state and ultimately will be developed into one of
         This facility normally is confined, with multiple  fence               the  typical  urban  land  uses,  although  at  the  time  of the
structure.   All  structures  and  grounds  are included that are                inventory, the intended use is impossible to determine.
known  to  be  associated  with  this  category,  either  by  the
interpretation  process  or  as  the  result of supplemental data                191       Undeveloped Land within urban areas

                   support.                192                                           Inactive  Land   with   street   pattern   but   without

177      Social and Services srcue

         This category is to list facilities which are unique  in               193       Urban  Land  in  transition  without positive indicators
structure  and  location.   Suppler ental  data  is  required  for                        of intended activity
identification; e.g., Elks Club, Masonic Lodge, V.F.W., etc.
                                                                               194      Other Open Land
179      institutional Under Construction

                                                                      182
<pb n="188" />

-Note    Mixed                                                                                               200   AGRICULTURE

         I. This category is used where no single use pre-
dominates.    When more than one-third intermixture of another use                           in a broad sense, agricultural land may  be  defined  as
or  uses  occurs,  the  specific  classification  is  changed  to                  those   lands   which   are   cultivated  to  produce  crops  and
Mixed.   But,  where  the  sum  of  the intermixture Is less than                  livestock.  The sub-categories  of  Agriculture  are;   Cropland,
one-third,  it is mapped as the dominant land use.                                 Pastureland,   Orchards,    Groves   (except  Citrus),  Vineyards,
                                                                              Nurseries,  Ornamental   Horticulture   Areas,   Citrus   Groves,
         The   Mixed   category   includes   developments   along                 Confined   Feeding   Operations,    specialty   Farms,  and  Other
transportation  routes  and  in cities, towns, and built-up areas                  Agriculture.
where  separate  land  uses  cannot   be   individually   mapped.
Residential,   commercial,  industrial and occasionally other land                 210      Cropland and Pastureland
uses will be included.                                                            ___

         2.  Abandoned or not in use                                                       This includes agricultural land  which  is  managed  for
                                                                              the production of row or field crops, and improved, unimproved
         Any  land  use  classification  that  is  confirmed   as                 and woodland pasture.
abandoned  or  not  in  use  will  be  preceded, in the numerical                            Cropland and Pastureland include:
identifier, by a zero ";i.e., 0175.

                                                                                       1.   Cropland harvested or land  from  which  crops  are
                                                                                            harvested, other than tree and bush crops, and
                                                                                            horticultural crops.

                                                                                       2.   Cropland  used  only  for  pasture  or  pasture  in
                                                                                            rotation with crops.

                                                                                       3.   Pastureland  used  more  or  less  permanently  for
                                                                                            that purpose.

                                                                                       Numerous variables must  be  recognized  in  identifying
                                                                              crop  and  pasture  uses  of  land in different parts of Florida.
                                                                              Field  size  and  shape  are  highly  variable   depending   upon
                                                                              topographic  conditions,  as  well as soil types, sizes of farms,
                                                                              kinds  of  crops  and   pastures,   capital   investment,    labor
                                                                              availability, and other conditions.

                                                                                       In Florida, supplemental irrigation of cropland and
                                                                              pastureland by use of overhead sprinklers can be detected from
                                                                              photography where distinctive circular patterns are created.
                                                                              Drainage  or  water  control  on  land  used  for  cropland   and
                                                                              pastureland at times creates a recognizable pattern that may be
                                                                              helpful in identifying this type of land use from photography.

                                                                                       The duration of crop growth in the field may be rather
                                                                              limited.   A  false impression of non-agricultural use in a field
                                                                              may result if the conditions  of  temporary  inactivity  are  not
                                                                              recognized.    However,    this  can  be  substantiated  by  field
                                                                              checking.

                                                                                       Pastures may he drained and/or irrigated  lands.   Where
                                                                              the management objective is to establish or maintain stands of
                                                                              grasses, such as bahia, pangola or bermuda grass, either alone
                                                                              or in mixtures with white clover or other legumes, land can he

                                                                     183
<pb n="189" />

categorized as pastures regardless of  treatment.   Much  of  the                   222      Fruit Orchards [Peaches are an example of  a  crop  type
permanent"  pastures  occur  on land which usually is not tilled                            which is typical for this category)
or  used  a s  cropland.   Topographically  rough   land,    stream
floodplains,  wooded  areas,  and  wetlands often may be used for                  223       other Groves [Pecan, avocado, coconut, mango, etc.)
pasture more or less permanently.
                                                                                        If  specific  crop  type  can  he determined from aerial
211       Improved Pasture                                                         photography,  Level  TV  classification  will  be   used;   e-g.,
                                                                               2231 - Pecan Grove.
         This category in most cases is composed of land which
has  been cleared, tilled, reseeded with specific grass types and                   230      Feeding Operations
periodically   improved  with   brush   control   and   fertilizer
application.    Water  ponds,  troughs,   feed bunkers, and in some                          Feeding    operations       are    specialized,    livestock
cases, cow trails are evident.                                                     production enterprises which include beef cattle feedlots,   dairy
                                                                               operations with confined feeding, large poultry farms and hog
212       Unimproved Pasture                                                       feedlots.    These  operations  have  large   animal   populations
                                                                               restricted to relatively small areas. This restriction results
         This category includes cleared land  with  major  stands                 in a concentration of waste material  that  is  an  environmental
of  trees  and  brush  where  native grasses have been allowed to                  concern.     The  attendant  waste  disposal  problems  justify  a
develop.  Normally, this land will  not  be  managed  with  brush                  separate  category  for  these  relatively  small  areas.           Some
control and fertilizer application.                                                operations  are  located  near  urban  areas to take advantage of
                                                                               proximity to transportation facilities and processing plants.
213      Woodland Pasture
                                                                               2 31     Cattle
         This is an area where forestlanda are used as pasture.
Strong evidence of  cattle  activity,  such  as  trails  to  feed                  232       Poultry
bunkers, salt licks and watering areas, is required. in some
cases, detection of cattle in the area will be the clue  used  to.                 2 33      Hogs
iaentify  this  category.   When  supplemental data is available,
this will be used along with verification during field checks.                     240       Nurseries and Vineyards

214      Row Crops                                                                           This category is composed  of  nurseries,   floricultural
                                                                               areas,  and seed-and-sod areas used perennially and generally not
         Corn, tomatoes, potatoes,  and  beans  are  typical  row                  rotated with other uses.
crops  found  in  Florida.   Rows  remain well defined even after
crops have been harvested.                                                         241       Tree Nursery

215      Field Crops                                                                         Areas in this  category  are  not  associated  with  the
                                                                               timber industry; trees primarily are ornamentals.
         Wheat, oats, hay and grasses are the primary types
identified   as   field   crops.   some  problems  may  occur  in                  242       Sod Farms
 identification of field crops, and field checks are necessary in
many cases, especially when crop growth is in the early stages.                              This  category  is  unique,  requiring the crop to be in
                                                                               harvest stages for detection. Supplemental data can be used for
220       Tree  Crops                                                              the Identification of this specific category.

         Orchards  and groves generally occur in areas possessing                 243       Orniasentals [perennial]
a specific combination of soil qualities and climatological
factors.   Water  bodies,  which  moderate  the  effects of short                            This  category  is defined as plants or shrubs grown for
duration temperature fluctuations, often are in  close  proximity                  decorative effects.
to these types of farming. Site selection for air drainage on
sloping land also may be important.

221      Citrus Groves Icrange, grapefruit, tangerine, etc.)

                                                                       184
<pb n="190" />

244      Vineyards                                                                                           300   RANGELAND

         This category is defined as land devoted to  cultivating                         Historically,  Rangeland  has been defined as land where
grape vines.                                                                     the  potential  natural  vegetation  is  predominantly   grasses,
                                                                             grasslike  plants,  forbs,  or  shrubs,  and  is capable of being
245      Floriculture [annual]                                                   grazed.   Management  practices  may   include   brush   control,
                                                                             regulation   of   grazing  intensity,  and  season  of  use.   If
         This  category  is defined as the cultivation of flowers                revegetated to improve the  forage  cover,  it  is  managed  like
(decorative flowering plants.)                                                   native  vegetation.   Generally,  this  land  is  not fertilized,
                                                                             cultivated, or irrigated.
246      Timber Nursery
                                                                                       The definition of Rangeland used in the CONSERVATION
         Areas in this category are associated  with  the  timber                NEEDS  INVENTORY  by  the  U.S.  Departments  of  Agriculture and
industry.     Tree   seedlings  (primarily  pine)  are  grown  for               Interior is used in This classification scheme and describes  the
forestation of timber sites,                                                     natural  potential   (climax)  plant  cover  as  being composed of
                                                                             principally  native  grasses,   forbs,  and  shrubs  valuable  for
250      Specialty Farms                                                         forage.   This  category includes Grassland, Shrub and Brushland,
                                                                              and Mixed Rangeland.
         Specialty farms include a variety of special  or  unique
farming  activities such as thoroughbred horse farms, dog kennels                310       Herbaceous
and aquaculture.
                                                                                       This category includes prairie grasses  which  occur  on
251      Horse Farms                                                             the  upland  margins  of the wetland zone and may be periodically
                                                                              inundated by water.  Generally, it is the marginal  area  between
         This  category  defines  farms  which  breed  and  train                marsh  and upland forested areas.  These grasslands are generally
horses for sport uses in racing, riding and harness racing.                       treeless, but in  wet  areas  would  have  many  types  of  soils
                                                                              resulting in a variety of vegetation types dominated by grasses
252      Dairy                                                                   sedges, rushes and other herbs, while dryer grass areas would  be
                                                                             dominated by wire grasses with some saw palmetto present.
         This  is  a commercial establishment which processes and
distributes milk and milk products.                                              320       Shrub and Brushland

253      Kennels                                                                           This  category  includes  saw  palmettos, gallberry, wax
                                                                             myrtle, coastal scrub, and other shrubs  and  brush.    Generally,
         In  this  category,  specific  uses  of  dogs  are   not                saw  palmetto is the most prevalent plant cover intermixed with a
defined.   In  most cases it will require ground "truthing" on an                wide variety of other scrub forest plants  such  as  scrub  oaks,
extensive basis by visiting each site.                                           sand  pines,  as well as various types of short grasses.  Coastal
                                                                              scrub vegetation would include pioneer herbs and shrubs composed
254      Aquaculture [Fish farms]                                                of  such  typical  plants  as sea purslane, sea grapes, sea oats,
                                                                              without any one of these types being dominant.
         The definition  of  this  category  is  the  culture  of
marine  or  aquatic  species  under  either natural or artificial                321       Palmetto Prairies
conditions.
                                                                                       These are areas in which saw palmetto  (Serenoa  repens)
259      Other                                                                   is  the  most  dominant  vegetation.    Common  associates  of saw
                                                                             palmetto  in  this  cover  type  are:   fetterbush,  tar  flower,
260      Other Open Lands [Rural]                                                gallberry,  wire  grass  and  brown  grasses.  This cover type is
                                                                              usually found on seldom flooded dry sand areas.   These  treeless
         This category includes those lands whose intended  usage               areas  are  often  similar to the pine flatwoods, but without the
cannot be determined.                                                            pines.
<pb n="191" />

322      Coastal Scrub                                                                                          400   FORESTLAND

         This  scrub  category  represents  a  conglomeration  of
species  found  in  the  coastal  zone.  A few of the more common                              Forestland  includes uplands, basically the drier areas,
components are saw palmetto, sand live oak, myrtle  oak,  yaupon,                    which have a tree crown density (crown closure of 10  percent  or
railroad  vine,  bay  bean,  sea  oats,  sea purslane, sea grape,                    more), and are dominated by trees and other woody vegetation.
spanish bayonet and prickly pear.  This cover type  is  generally
found in dune and white sand areas.                                                            Lands  from  which  trees have been removed to less than
                                                                              10 percent crown closure, but which have not been  developed  for
329       Other Shrubs and Brssh                                                     other  use,  are  also  included  in this category.  For example,
                                                                              lands   on   which   there   are   rotation   cycles,    involving
         This  category  includes  other  shrubs  and brush cover                   clear-cutting  and  block  planting,  are  part of the forestland
types not previously mentioned.                                                      classification.

330       Mixed Rangeland                                                                      Since most naturally seeded forestlands are composed  of
                                                                              a  mixture  of  species, for purposes of classification a minimum
         When  more  than  one-third    intermixture   of   either                  of 66 2/3 percent stand dominance (by crown area measurement)  of
grassland  or  shrub-brushland range species occurs, the specific                    one  species  or  species  groups is necessary for inclusion into
classification  is  changed  to  Mixed  Rangeland.          Where   the              separate categories.   Less than 66 2/3  percent  stand  dominance
intermixture  is  less  than  one-third,   it is classified as the                   of  one  species  or  species  groups is considered to be a mixed
dominant type of  Rangeland,  whether  Grassland,  of  Shrub  and                    category.  It should be noted that  classification  is  based  on
Brushland categories.                                                                overstory  species composition, as interpreted from aerial photo-
                                                                              graphy.  Forestlands are classified as follows:

                                                                              410       Coniferous Forest

                                                                                       A  Coniferous  Forest  is  a  forested  area  having   a
                                                                              dominant  tree  crown  that  is  of  coniferous  species and is a
                                                                              result of natural seeding.

                                                                              411       Pine Flatwoods [undifferentiated]

                                                                                        This is a forested area dominated by longleaf pine on
                                                                              the drier sites, and slash and/or longleaf pine on the wetter
                                                                              areas.    Common   understory   associates   are   saw   palmetto,
                                                                              wiregrass, wax myrtle, fetterbush, and gallberry.

                                                                              412       Longleaf-Xeric Oak

                                                                                        This forest type is dominated by longleaf pine. Common
                                                                              understory associates are bluejack  oak,  turkey  oak,  and  sand
                                                                              post oak.

                                                                               413       Sand Pine Scrub

                                                                                        This forested area occurs on excessively drained sands,
                                                                               often associated with former dune areas.  The dominant  overstory
                                                                               tree  is sand pine.  Common understory trees are myrtle oak, sand
                                                                               live oak, and chapman oak.

                                                                      186

                  -_ '__mm  -  -  -                              _-  -              _mm mm mm
<pb n="192" />

414      Australian Pine                                                           426       Tropical Hammock

         This is not a true pine; the species is  commonly  found                           This is a cover type  also  referred  to  as  a  coastal
in almost pure stands with little or no understory vegetation.                     hammock.   Common  components  of  this  cover type include gumbo
                                                                              limbo, mastic, stoppers, wild  lime,  strangler  fig,  lancewood,
415      Longleaf-Upland Oak                                                       poison wood, sea grape, marl berry, and wild tamarind.

         This  forest  type  is  dominated 'by  an  overstory  of                 427       Dpland Temperate Hammock
longleaf pine and upland oak, commonly live oak or laurel oak.
                                                                                       This  is  a  cover  type  in  which  live oak is pure or
419      Other Pine                                                                predominant.  Common associates are sweetgum, southern  magnolia,
                                                                              holly and laurel oak.
         This category is  composed  of  other  coniferous  cover
types not previously mentioned.                                                    428       Cabbage Palm

420      Hardwood Forest                                                                     This  is  a  cover type in which cabbage palm is pure or
                                                                              predominant.   Associates  are  southern  red   cedar,    southern
         A  Hardwood  Forest is a forested area having a dominant                 magnolia,  live  oak,  sand  live  oak with smaller quantities of
tree crown that is  of  hardwood  species  and  is  a  result  of                  laurel oak, red maple, redbay and holly.
natural seeding.
                                                                              429      Wax Myrtle-Willow
421      Xeric Oak
                                                                                        This is a cover type in which wax myrtle -and/or willow
         This  forest  area  is  dominated by xeric oak generally                  is  pure or predominant.   It is often an indicator of a disturbed
located on well-drained upland sands.   Typical  species  include                  site and is commonly found on moist ground.
bluejack oak, turkey oak, and sand post oak.
                                                                              430       Hardwoods Forest Continued
422      Brazilian Pepper
                                                                              431      Beech-Magnolia
         This  cover  type frequently occurs in dense pure stands
often  excluding  understory  vegetation.   It  is  generally  andicator  species  of  this  forest  type,
indicator of a disturbed site.                                                     although  it may not be the most abundant.  Southern magnolia and
                                                                              a great variety of other  moist  site  hardwoods  occur  in  this
423      Oak-Pine -Hickory                                                         forest  with  common  associates  including  sweetgum,  blackgum,
                                                                              yellow poplar,  southern  red  oak,  white  oak,  white  ash  and
         This  is  a mixed forest type in which no one species is                  hickories.
consistently dominant.  Major components of this cover  type  are
southern  red  oak, post oak, black oak, shortleaf pine, loblolly                   432      Sand Live Oak
pine, mockernut hickory and dogwood.
                                                                                        Sand   live   oak   predominates  in  this  cover  type.
424      Melaleuca                                                                 Associates are cabbage palm,  southern  red  cedar  and  southern
                                                                              magnolia with smaller quantities of chapman oak, myrtle oak, red
         This species occurs in almost pure  stands.    It  is  an                 maple, redbay, and holly.  This cover type is generally found  on
extremely  aggressive  competitor,  often  taking  over  a  site,                   old coastal dune and white sand areas.
forming a dense impenetrable stand.  Melaleuca  generally  is  an
indicator of a disturbed site.                                                      438      Mised Hardwood

42 5     Teimperate Ham m ock                                                                This  is  a  mixed  hardwood forest type in which no one
                                                                               species  achieves  66  2/3  percent  composition  by  crown  area
         This  is  a  cover  type  also  referred  to  as  a  low                  measurement.
hammock.  Cormon ccrponents of this cover  type  include  cabbage
palm,  caks  (centrally  live  oak), red-hay, swentbay, yaupon and
cedar.

                                                                     187
<pb n="193" />

                          439                                                                               500   WATER
439       Other Hardwood

         This  category  includes  other hardwood cover types not                           The delineation of water areas depends on the scale  and
                                                                              resolution  characteristics of the remote-sensor photography user
pr evi ousl1y mentioned.
                                                                              for interpretation.  One definition of water bodies, provided  by
440      Tree Plantations                                                          the  Bureau of Census, includes all areas within the land mass of
                                                                              the United States that are predominately or persistently water
441       Coniferous                                                               covered,  provided  that,  if  linear, they are at least 1/8 mile
                                                                              (660 feet or 200 meters) wide, and if extended,  cover  at  least
         These areas are forests created as a result of  planting                 40 acres (16 hectares).
coniferous seedling stock or by direct seeding methods.
                                                                                       Defining  water  boundaries  at  Level III, minimum size
442       Hardwood                                                                 has been established to less than 10 acres.  In  some  instances,
                                                                              water  bodies  of one acre will be plotted and identified.  Water
         These  areas are forests created as a result of planting                 bodies or those  portions  of  the  water  body  having  emergent
hardwood seedling stock or by direct seeding methods.                              vegetation are placed in the Wetland category.

443       Regeneration Area                                                        510      Streams and Waterways

         Regeneration areas are  forestlands  where  clearcutting                          This  category  includes  rivers,  creeks,  canals,  and
and  block  plant timber management practices are in evidence and                  other  linear  water  bodies.    Where   the   water   course   is
where it is evident that the intended future use will not  be  in                  interrupted  by  a  control structure, the impounded area will be
another  land use category.  This category also includes areas of                  placed in the Reservoirs category.
site preparation and planting.
                                                                                       The boundary between streams and lakes,  reservoirs,  or
444      Experimental Tree Farms                                                  the  ocean  is  the straight line across the mouth of the stream,
                                                                              unless the mouth is more than one mile  (1.85  kilometers)  wide.
         These areas are devoted to testing'-the  growth  response                In  that  case,  the  rule  given  under  Bays  and  Estuaries is
of   different   forest  tree  species  to  various  experimental                 followed.
silvicultural treatments. 520 Lakes

                                                                                       The Lakes category includes inland water bodies, but
                                                                              excludes  reservoirs.   Islands within lakes that are too small to
                                                                              delineate will be included in the water  area.   The  delineation
                                                                             of a lake will be based on the size of the water body at the
                                                                              time the remote-sensor data is acquired.

                                                                              521      Lakes larger than 500 acres (202 hectares)

                                                                              522      Lakes larger than 100  acres  (400  hectares)  but  less
                                                                                       than 500 acres

                                                                              523      Lakes  less  than 100 acres but greater than 10 acres (4
                                                                                       hectares)

                                                                              524      Lakes less than 10 acres which are dominant features

                                                                              530      Reservoirs

                                                                                       Reservoirs are artificial impoundments of  water.   They
                                                                             are   used   for   irrigation,  flood  control,  municipal  water
                                                                             supplies, recreation, or hydro-electric power generation.   Dams,

                                                                    188
<pb n="194" />

levees,   other  water  control  structures,  or  the  excavation
itself, usually will be evident to aid the identification.                                                    600   WETLANDS

531       Reservoirs larger than 500 acres
                                                                                         Wetlands are those areas where the water  table  is  at,
                    532  Reservoirs larger than  100  acres  but  less  than  500  near,  or  above  the land surface for a significant part of most
                           532Reservoirslargerthan acres  bu t lyears.   The  hydrologic  regime  is   such   that   aquatic   or
                                       acres                                     hydrophytic  vegetation usually is established, although alluvial

533       Reservoirs  larger  than  10  acres  but  less  than 100                 and tidal flats may b e nonvegetated.            wetlands are  frequently
         533 Reservoirs larger than 10 acres  bu t   l e ss  than 100            associated  with  topographic lows.  Examples of wetlands include
                                                                                smarshes,  mudflats,  emergent  vegetation  areas,   and   swamps.

540       Bays and Estuaries                                                      Shallow   water  areas  with  submerged  aquatic  vegetation  are
                                                                                classed as Water and are not included in the Wetlands category.

         Bays and estuaries are inlets or arms of  the  sea  that                          Extensive parts of some  river  floodplains  qualify  as
extend  into  the  land  and, as such, are properly classified in                           Etnse           s o   oe  rielan we                         as
this system only when they are included within the land  mass  of                  etlands.   These  do not include agriculture land where seasonal
Florida.                                                                           wetness  or  short-term  flooding  may   provide   an   important
                                                                                component  of  the  total annual soil moisture necessary for crop
         In  order  that this land mass area be commensurate with                production.  But, uncultivated wetlands  yielding  products  such
                    the  area  of  the  United  States  used  in   compiling   census  as  wood,  or  grazed  by livestock, are retained in the Wetlands
stharaoftheUitdSaeusedincomiln caegory.
statistics,  the  convention  used by the Bureau of the Census in                  category.
setting  the  outer  limits  of  the  United  States   has   been
followed.   Where  bays  and  estuaries  are  between  1  and  10                           Wetlands areas drained for any purpose belong  to  other
nautical miles (1.85 and 18.5 kilometers)  in  width,  the  outer                  land  use  categories,  whether  they  be Agriculture, Rangeland,
limit  of  the  United  States will be a straight line connecting                  Forested Uplands, or Urban or Built-up.   When  the  drainage  is
the headlands, except where the indentation of the  embayment  is                  discontinued  and  such  use  ceases,  classification  reverts to
so  shallow  that the water area would be less than the area of a                  Wetlands  after  characteristic  vegetation   is   reestablished.
semicircle drawn with this straight line  as  the  diameter.   In                  Wetlands  managed  for  wildlife  purposes  may  show  short-term
that  event,  the  coastline itself would form the outer limit of                  changes in vegetation type and  wetness  condition  as  different
the United States.                                                                 management  practices  are  used,  but  are  properly  classified
                                                                                Wetlands.

         Embayments less than one  nautical  mile  in  width  are
classed  as  Streams  and  Canals.   Embayments  or  portions  of                  610       Hardwood Forest
embayments more than  10  nautical  miles  (18.5  kilometers)  in                            Wetland-Hardwood Forest areas are those  wetlands  which
width are not considered included within the land mass.                                      Wetland-Hardwood Forest areas are those  wetlands  which
                                                                                meet  the  crown closure requirements for the Hardwood Forest and
541      Opening directly into the Gulf or Atlantic Ocean                          are a result of natural seeding.  These wetland trees  are  found
                                                                                 both in salt and freshwater areas.

542      Not opening directly into the Gulf or Atlantic Ocean
                                                                                 611       Bay Swamp
550       Major Springs
                      -550    Major Springs       This  category  is  composed  of  dominant trees such as
         The  natural  phenomena  known  as springs can easily be                 loblolly bay, sweetbay, redbay and slash pine.  Large  gallberry,
identified as points of  origin  of  a  water  source.   In  many                  fetterbush, wax myrtle and titi are the understory vegetation.
instances,  major  springs  such  as Silver Springs and Homosassa
Springs   can   readily   be   identified'  by   the   associated                  612       Mangrove Swamp
recreational-commercial enterprises in the adjacent area.
                                                                                          This  category  is  composed  of  red  or black mangrove
560      Slough Waters                                                             which is pure or predominant.  The  chief  associates  are  white
                                                                                 mangrove, buttonwood, cabbage palm and sea grape.
         Slocghs  are  c,.Lnels  of  slow  roving  water  in  the
coacstal zarshland.  The term also refers to "backwater  sloughs",
those  rnarrcw,  often  sta.narnt Iodies of water found near inland
rivers.

                                                                         189
<pb n="195" />

     613      Gum Swamp                                                                 623       Atlantic White Cedar

               This  category  is  composed  of  swamp  tupelo or water                           In this category, atlantic white cedar is the  indicator
      tupelo which is pure  or  predominant.   Associated  species  are                  species  although it may not always be the most abundant.  Common
     bald  cypress and a great number of wet site hardwoods, with wide                  associates are  slash  pine,  cypress,  swamp  tupelo,  sweetbay,
      variation in composition.                                                          redbay, loblolly bay, black titi and red maple.

      614      Titi Swamp                                                               630        Forested-Mixed

               This category is composed  of  black  titi  and  cyrilla                           This  is  a  mixed  wetland,  hardwood coniferous forest
      which  are  predominant.    Associated  species are bays, cypress,                 type in which neither hardwood nor  coniferous  species  achieves
      swamp tupelo, and a great number of wet site hardwoods.                            66 2/3 percent stand composition, by crown area measurement.

      615      Stream and Lake Swamp                                                     640       Vegetated Non-Forested

               This category is  also  referred. to  as  bottomland  or                           Wetland-vegetated,   non-forested  lands  are  found  in
      stream  hardwoods,  and  cover  type is found on river, creek and                  seasonably flooded basins, meadows, and  marshes.   Wetlands  are
      lake overflow areas.  It  is  a  conglomeration  of  species,  of                 usually  confined  to relatively level areas.  This category does
      which  some  of  the  more  common components are:  pond cypress,                  not  include  areas  whose  tree  cover  meets  the  crown  cover
      bald cypress,  red  raple,  river  birch,  water  oak,  sweetgum,                  threshold  for  the forested categories.  When the forested crown
      willow,  swamp tupelo, okeechee tupelo, water hickory, water ash,                  cover is less  than  the  threshold  for  Wetland  Forest  or  is
      and buttonbush.                                                                    non-woody,  it  will  be included in this category.  Sawgrass and
                                                                                      cattail are predominant communities in freshwater marshes,  while
      616      Inland Ponds and Sloughs                                                  spartina  and  needlerush  are  the  predominant  saltwater marsh
                                                                                      communities.
               This category is found in depressions or drainage  areas
      not  associated  with  streams  or  lakes.   One of the following                  641       Freshwater Marsh
      species will generally predominate in  these  communities:   pond
      cypress, swamp tupelo, water tupelo, titi or willow.                                         In this  category,  these  communities  will  have  pre-
                                                                                      dominantly one or more of the following species:
      620      Coniferous  Forest
                                                                                                Sawgrass and Cattail, Bulrush and Maidencane
                Wetland-Coniferous  Forest areas are wetlands which meet                           Marshes
      the crown closure requirements for the Coniferous forest and  are
      a  result  of  natural seeding.  These species are commonly found                            Sawgrass - (Cladium jamaicensis)
      in the interior wetlands in such places as  river  flood  plains,                           Arrowhead - (Sagittaria sp.)
      bogs, bayheads, and sloughs.                                                                 Maidencane - (Panicum hemitomon)
                                                                                                Cattail - (Typha    domingensis,    T.   latifolia,   T.
      621      Cypress                                                                             angustifolia)
                                                                                                Pickerel Weed - (Pontederia lanceolata, P. cordata)
                This  category  is  composed  of  pond  cypress  or bald                           Buttonbush - (Cephalanthus occidentalis)
      cypress which is pure  or  predominant.   In  the  case  of  pond                            Spartina - (Spartina bakeri)
      cypress,  common  associates  are  swamp  tupelo, slash pine, and                            Switchgrass - (Panicum virgatum)
      black titi.  In the case of bald cypress, common  associates  are                            Bulrush - (Scirpus   americanus,    S.    validus,    S.
      water  tupelo, swamp cottonwood, red maple, american elm, pumpkin                            robustus)
      ash, carolina ash, overcup oak, and water hickory.  Bald  cypress                            water lily - (Nymphea sp.)
      may  be associated with laurel oak, sweetgum and sweetbay on less                            Bladderwort - (Utricularia sp.)
      moist sites.                                                                                Needlerush - (Juncus effusus)
                                                                                                Common Reed - (Phragmites communis [australis))
       622      Pond Pine
                                                                                       6411      Sawgrass (Cladium jamaicensis)
                This catecory is crrosed of fond pine which is pure  or
       rrecr.inant.   The nancr associate is titi.  Minor associates are                 6412      Cattail (Typha sp.)
       sweetbay, lblolly lay, rcdbay and "wamp tupelo.

                                                                              190

-   _-  _   _-  _----                                                                                                                            m   -   -
<pb n="196" />

642       Saltwater Marsh                                                           644       Emergent Aquatic Vegetation

          In   this   category,    these   communities   will  have                           This  category  includes  floating   vegetation   and/or
predominantly one or more of the following species:                                 aquatic  vegetation  that  is found partially or completely above
                                                                                 the surface of the water.
         S__artina and Needlerush Marshes
                                                                                 6441      Water Lettuce - (Pistia stratiotes)
         Cordgrasses
         Cordgrasses - (Spartina alterniflora, S.                                  6442       Spatterdock - (Nuphar sp.)
         cynosuroides, S. patens, S. spartinae)
         Needlerush - (Juncus roemerianus)                                         6443       Water Hyacinth - (Eichhornia sp.)
         Seashore Saltgrass - (Distichlis spicata)
         Saltwort - (Batis maritima)                                               5444       Duckweed - (Lemna sp.)
         Glassworts -(Salicornia sp.)
         Fringerush - (Finbristylis castanea)                                      645        Submergent Aquatic Vegetation
         Salt Dropseed - (Sporobolus virginicus)
         Seaside Daisy - (Borrichia frutescens)                                               This category  is  composed  of  those  aquatic  species
         Salt Jointgrass - (Paspalum vaginatum)                                     found growing completely below the surface of the water.

6421      Cordgrass (Spartina)                                                       650       Non-Vegetated

         Vegetation association is the  same  as  listed  in  642                             Wetland   non-vegetated  areas  are  those  areas  where
(Saltwater  Marsh)  classification.   However, dominant vegetation                  vegetation may be lacking due to the erosional  effects  of  wind
is  one   of   the   following:       (Spartina   alterniflora,   S.                 and  water  transporting  the  surface  material  so rapidly that
cynosuroides, S. patens or S. spartinae).                                            plant establishment is curtailed.  Also, submerged  or  saturated
                                                                                 materials  often develop toxic conditions of extreme acidity from
6422      Needlerush (Juncus)                                                        sulfur generation.    Tidal  flats,  shorelines  and  intermittent
                                                                                 ponds are a main component of this category.
         Vegetation association is the same as listed in 642
(Saltwater Marsh) classification.   However,  dominant  vegetation                  651       Tidal Flats
is (Juncus roemerianus).
                                                                                          This category is composed of that portion of the shore
643       Wet Prairies                                                               environment  protected  from  wave  action,  as   in   estuaries,
                                                                                 comprised  primarily  of  muds  drained  by  tidal  channels.  An
         This   category   is   composed   of  dominantly  grassy                   important characteristic of the tidal  flat  environment  is  its
vegetation of wet soils, usually distinguished   from  marshes  by                   alternate  submergence  and  subaerial  exposure during the tidal
having  less  water  and shorter herbage.  These communities will                    cycle.
have predominantly one or more of the following species:
                                                                                 652       Shoreline
         Maidencane - (Panicum hemitomon)
         C.Drigrasses - (Spartina bakeri, S. patens)                                          This category is usually defined as the line where  land
         F ikerushes - (Eleocharis sp.)                                             and  water  meet.   Shorelines  are  formed  mainly  by marine or
         Eeach Pushes - (Rhynchospora sp.)                                          biological  agents  like  coral  reefs,  barrier   beaches,    and
         St. Jchns Wort - (Hypericum sp.)                                           marshes.    (The shore is defined as the zone from low tide to the
         Sliderlily - (Hyrenocallis palmeri)                                        farthest point on land where waves transport sands.)
         Swar-plily - (Crinum americanum)
         Yellow-eyed Grass - (Xeric ambigua)                                        653       Intermittent Pond
         Whitetop Sedge - (Dichromrena colorata)
                                                                                     This category is defined as a waterbody which exists  usually
                                                                                 only  during  a  portion  of  the  year.  Its existence relies on
                                                                                 water received from direct precipitation, runoff or spring flow.

                                                                        191
<pb n="197" />

                        700   BARREN LAND                                         741       Rural  land  in  transition  without positive indicators
                                                                                        of intended activity

         Barren  land  has  very  little  or  no  vegetation  and                   742       Borrow Areas
limrited  ability to support life.  In general, it is an area with
only soil, sand  or  rocks.   Vegetation,   if  present,  is  very                   743       Spoil Areas
widelf   spaced   and   scrubby.       However,  land  also  may  be
temporarily barren due  to  man's  activities.   Generally,   this                   744       Fill Areas [highways-railways]
land  is  included  in  another land use category.  Vast areas of
agricultural land are temporarily without  vegetation  cover  due
to  tillage  practices,  and  areas  of extractive and industrial
land use  have  dumps  for  wastes  and  tailings.   Barren  Land
categories  are  Beaches  (areas exhibitinglittle or no evidence
of human encroachment), Sand  Other  Than  Beach,  Exposed  Rock,
Disturbed Lands.

710      Beaches Other Than Swimming Beaches

         Beaches  are  constantly  affected  by  wave  and  tidal
action.  The fine clays and silts are washed away  leaving  sand.
However,  in  protected  bay and marsh areas, fine soil particles
from surface drainage waters may settle  out.   The  beach  areas
also  are  subject  to  water  and wind erosion.  Differing beach
dimensions are due to factors such as tides, soil material  size,
water  level  and  wave energy, all of which vary.  When a stable
surface is observed  inland,  as  another  land  use  occurs  and
erosion  effects  of  water and wind decrease, the beach category
is then terminated.

720      Sand Other Than Beaches

         Sand  other  than  beaches  is  composed  primarily   of
dunes.   These  are  of  aeolian  origin  composed of sand grains
downwind  from  a  natural  source  of  sand.   Dune  sizes  vary
greatly,  with  diameters  ranging  from  a few feet to more than
several hundred.   Their  heights  also  vary  and  their  shapes
display  considerable  variety.    When  the  dunes  are the major
feature, shore and strand  lines,  coastal  plains,  river  flood
plains, and deltas are secondary.

730      Exposed Rock

         Exposed  rock areas consist of exposed bedrock and other
accumulation  of  rocks  lacking   vegetative   cover.    Exposed
bedrock,  when  weathered,  ray  be  urvegetated due to fine soil
removal by water or wind erosion.

740      Disturbed Lands

         Disturbed lands are te areas  that  have  been  changed
due  to  man's  activities,  other  than  rining  activities.  In
Florida, these areas ray be rather  extensive  aid  often  arpear
outside of urban areas.

                                                                      192
<pb n="198" />

        800   TRANSPORTATION, COMMUNICATION AND UTILITIES                        820       Communications

                                                                                        Airwave communications, radar  and  television  antennas
810      Transportation                                                           with  associated  structures are typical major types that will be
                                                                               identified, when stations are associated with  a  commercial  or
         Transportation facilities are used for the  movement  of                governmental  facility,  they  will  be included in that specific
people  and  goods;  therefore, they are major influences on land                 category when located within the bounds of the specific  facility
and many land use boundaries are outlined by them.                                and will not be listed as a separate element.

         Highways are  easily  identifiable  on  medium  altitude                821       Transmission  Towers  [microwave  are  typical  in  this
photography.   Highways  include  areas  used  for  interchanges,                          category]
limited  access  rights-of-way,  and  service  facilities.    The
center  median,  pavement  and  sizable  buffer  zone  should  be           B      22      Communication    Facilities    [includes         transmitter
included even if exact boundaries cannot be detected.                                      stations, telephone exchanges, antenna farms, etc.]

         The Transportation  category  encompasses  rail-oriented                829       Communication Facilities Under Construction
facilities   including   stations,   round-houses,    repair   and
switching yards, and related areas.  Airport  facilities  include                 830      Utilities
runways,    intervening   land,   terminals,   service  buildings,
navigation aids, fuel storage, parking lots and a limited  buffer                          Utilities  usually  include power generating facilities,
zone, and fall within the Transportation category.                                water treatment plants  and  their  related  functions,  such  as
                                                                               transmission   lines  for  the  electric  power  facilities,  and
         Transportation   areas   also   em.b race   ports,  docks,              aeration fields for the sewer treatment sites.  Small  facilities
shipyards, dry docks, locks and  watercourse  control  structures                 or  those associated with an industrial, commercial or extractive
designed  for  transportation  purposes.   The  docks  and  ports                 land use, are included within the larger category.
include  buildings,  piers,  parking  lots  and  adjacent   water
utilized  by  ships  in  the  loading  or  unloading  of cargo or                 831      Electrical Power Facilities
passengers.  Locks, in addition to the actual structure,  include
the   control   buildings,  power  supply  buildings,  docks  and                          This category  includes  hydropower,  thermal,  nuclear,
surrounding supporting land use,  i.e.  parking  lots  and  green                 gas turbine plants, transformer yards, sub-stations.
areas.
                                                                               832      Electrical Power Transmission Lines
811      Airports
                                                                               833      Water Supply Plants [including pumping stations]
812      Railroads
                                                                                        This   category   includes  treatment  plants,  settling
813   Bus and Truck Terminals                                                     basins, water storage towers and well fields.

814      Major Highways                                                           834      Sewage Treatment

815      Port Facilities                                                                   This category is  composed  of  all  related  facilities
                                                                               such as aeration fields, digesters, etc.
    86  Canal and Locks
                                                                               835      Solid Waste Disposal
817      Oil, Water, or Gas Long Distance Transmission Lines

                                                                                        This  category  is  composed  of  controlled and managed
818      Auto  Parking  Facilities  (when not directly related to          s       olid waste fields, non-permitted  solid  waste  disposal  sites,
         other land use)                                                         etc.

819      Transrortation Faciliris Under Construction                             839       Utilities Under Construction

                                                                       193
<pb n="199" />

900      This section is reserved for special
         classification

         This  category  is used primarily for specific topics to
be addressed for a specific user requirement of those  land  uses
and land comrer which require identification at Level III or IV.
e.g. Marine grasses    -    dense
                        -    medium
                        -    sparse

                                                                          194
<pb n="200" />

                             IX.  GLOSSARY

abiotic - any inorganic part of the environment.

amphipod - small macroscopic crustacean; body is laterally compressed.

anaerobic - a condition associated with absence of free oxygen in the

    environment.

benthic - living on the bottom.

brackish water - water that has a salt content intermediate between fresh

    water the sea.

coastal wetland - land where the water table is at or near the surface or

    the  land  is  covered  by  shallow  water  or  tidally  influenced.

community - all the plants and animals of an area (or volume) which form a

     interactive  assemblage.

crustacean - a class of animals that have a hard outer shell; includes

     shrimp, crabs, lobsters.

detritus - particles of non-living organic matter, usually in various

     stages of decomposition.

dike - a dam  or embankment erected to prevent flooding of a lowland area.

dredge spoil - sediment material removed from a wetland bottom during

     dredging  operations.

ecosystem  - the  community  and  its  non-living  environment,  considered

     collectively.

epibenthic - living on the surface of bottom.

epiphyte - plant or animal attached to a plant, typically not a parasitic

     relationship.

euryhaline  -  able  to  tolerate  wide  variation  of  salinity  regimes.

                                   195
<pb n="201" />

facultative halophyte - able to live under freshwater and saltwater

    influences  but  living  mostly  under  saltwater  influence  due  to

    exclusion of other species.

finfish - sharks, rays, and bony fishes.

fishery - the complex of interactions within and between the population s)

    of fish being harvested, the population s) of fishermen, and the
    environments  of  each.I

food chain - the series of nutritional steps through which food passes from

    plants to herbivores to carnivores; also the nutritional steps in-

    volved  in  parasite  and  microbial  (decomposer)  chains.

food web - the interlocking pattern formed by parallel and cross connectingI

    food chains.

habitat  - the  natural  environment  in which  an  organism  lives.

habitat component - a specific part, be it organic, inorganic, chemical,I

    or environmental, of an organism' s environment.

hectare  -  a measure  of  area  equal  to  2.47  acres.I

infauna - animals living within the sediment.

isopod - small macroscopic crustacean; body is flattened.

life history - the series of stages through which an organism passes during

    its entire lifetime.

macrophytes - plants larger than microscopic size.

meiofauna - microscopic and small macroscopic animals living on the bottom.

meroplankton - larval plankton 15-20 rmm in size.I

nekton - macroscopic swimming animals that can freely regulate their dis-

    tribution against movements of water masses.

non-point source pollution - pollution originating from non-localized

     sources such as storm drains.

                                 1961
<pb n="202" />

          nutrient - an organic or inorganic chemical substance required for the

               growth and reproduction of organisms.

             omnivorous  - eating  a diet  of  both  plants  and  animals.

             pelagic -living offshore.

           photic zone - surface zone of sea or lake sufficiently illuminated for

 *                 photosynthesis.

           photosynthesis - the chemical processes through which green plants manu-

                   facture organic molecules from inorganic using sunlight as an energy

                source.

              plankton -aquatic organisms that cannot freely regulate their distribution

                against movements of water masses; includes microscopic plants (phyto-

                plankton) and microscopic animals (zooplankton).

3            point  source  pollution  -  pollution  originating  from  known,  localized

                sources.

              polychaete - a marine worm.

              productivity -the rate of production of organic matter by living organisms

                (i.e., the amount per unit time).

*             recruitment -the  process  of  addition  of  animals  to  a  population.

                Typically, the term is used to describe when, or how large fishes are

                   when  they  first  enter  a fishery.

           rhizome -a horizontal underground stern.

           riprap -rock, stone, or other rough material placed on stream banks, dam

                faces, and other structures to protect against erosion by the water.

           sediment load - all particulate material (inorganic or organic) suspended

 3                  in or transported downstream by water (may include clay, silt, sand,

                organic detritus, etc.).

                                                              197
<pb n="203" />

sedimentation - the settling out of suspended matter from the water to the

    bottom.

sessile - attached to a substrate; non-motile.

shellfish - oysters, clams, scallops, and conch.

species - a group of populations in which the organisms reproduce and main -

    tain separateness, genetically.1

species diversity - the variety of types of organisms present in an area.

stress  -  a  strain  or  pressure  applied  to  an  organism  (or  group  of

    organi sms) by an unfavorable or stress-producing factor.

tidal node - the area of no current velocity where an incoming tide meetsI

from opposite directions or from which an outgoing tide recedes in opposite

di recti ons.

trophic  level  - one  of  the  several  levels  of  a food  chain;  plants

constitute  the  primary  level,  herbivores  the  second  level,  and

    carnivores the third and remaining levels.

turbidity - the condition of water resulting from the presence of suspended

    material,  often  expressed  as interference  with  light  transmission.I

                                             198
<pb n="204" />

                               X.  LITERATURE CITED

1. Anderson, J. M. and M. R. Peterson. 1969. DDT: sublethal effects on brook
         trout  nervous  system.    Science  164:  440-441.

2.  Bahr,  L. M.  and W.  P. Lanier.   1981.   The ecology of intertidal  oyster
         reefs of the South Atlantic coast:   a community profile.   U.S. Fish
         and Wildlife Service, Office of Biological Services, Washington, D.C.
         FWS/OBS  -  81/15.    105  pp.

3. Barrett, B. B. and M. C. Gillespie. 1973. Primary factors which influence
         commercial  shrimp production in coastal Louisiana.   La. Wildl. Fish.
         Comm.  Tech.  Bull.  9.  28  pp.

4.  Bass, R. J. and J. W. Avault, Jr.  1975.   Food habits, length-weight re-
         lationship,  condition  factor,  and  growth  of  juvenile  red  drum,
         Sciaenops ocellata, in Louisiana.   Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 104(1):  35-
         45.

5.  Beal,  K. L.   1980.   Territorial  sea fisheries management  and estuarine
         dependence. Pp. 67-77 in V. S. Kennedy (ed.), Estuarine Perspectives.
         Academic  Press,  Inc.,  New  York.    533  pp.

6.  Beebe, W. and J. Tee-Van.   1928.  The fishes of Port-au-Prince Bay, Haiti.
         Zoologica  10(1):    1-26,  60-62,  124,  127-128.

7.  Bjorndal, K. A.  1980.  Nutrition and grazing behavior of the green turtle
         Chelonia  mydas.    Mar.  Biol.  56:  147-154.

8.  Blake, N. J., L. J. Doyle, and T. E. Pyle.  1976.  The benthic ecology of a
         thermally altered area of Tampa Bay, Florida.   Pp. 296-301 in G. W.
         Esch and R. W. McFarlane  (eds.), Thermal  Ecology II.  Atomic Enerqy
         Commission Symposium Series (Conf. 750425), Augusta, Georgia.

9.  Brannon,  D.  P.,  W.  H. Kuyper,  L. Clay,  and K. Haddad.   1981.   Florida
         LANDSAT  demonstration  project  report.    NASA/NSTL  Earth  Resources
         Laboratory DR-002. 35 pp.

10.  Brook,  I. M.    1978.    Comparative  macrofaunal  abundance  in  turtlegrass
          (Thalassia testudinum) communities in south Florida characterized by
         high  blade  density.    Bull.  Mar.  Sci.  28(1):  213-217.

11.  Butler, P.A.   1966.   The problem of pesticides in estuaries.   Amer. Fish.
          Soc.  Spec.  Publ.  No.  3:    110-115.

12.  Carlton, J.  1974.  Land building and stabilization by mangroves.  Environ.
          Conserv.  1(4):    285-294.

13.  Carlton, J. M. and M. D. Moffler.   1978.   Propagation of mangroves by ai,-
          layering.    Environ.  Conserv.  5(2):    147-150.

                                         199
<pb n="205" />

14. Carr,  W. E. S. and C. A. Adams.   1973.   Food habits of juvenile marine
        fishes occupying seagrass beds in the estuarine zone near Crystal
        River,  Florida.    Trans.  Am.  Fish.  Soc.  102(3):    511-540.

15. Carr, W. E. S. and J. T. Giesel.   1975.   Impact of thermal effluent from a
         steam-electric  station  on  a marshland  nursery  area during the hot
         season.    Fish.  Bull.  73(1):    67-80.

16. Clark,  J. R.   1977.   Coastal  ecosystem management.   Conservation Founda-
         tion, Washington, D. C.  921 pp.

17. Coastal Coordinating Council, State of Florida.   1973.   Statistical inven-
         tory of key biophysical  elements in Florida's coastal  zone.   Talla-
         hassee, Fla.  43 pp.

18. Conner, W. G. and J. L. Simon. 1979. The effects of oyster shell dredging
         on an estuarine benthic community.   Est. Coast. Mar. Sci. 9: 749-758.

19. Copeland,  B.  J.   1970.   Estuarine  classification  and response  to dis-
         turbances. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 4: 826-835.

20. Copeland, B. J.  1965.  Evidence for regulation of community metabolism in
         a marine ecosystem. Ecology 46(4): 563-564.

21. Copi, I. M. 1972. Introduction to logic. Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc.,
         New York. 540 pp.

22. Costello, T. J. and D. M. Allen. 1970. Synopsis of biological data on the
         pink  shrimp  Penaeus  duorarum duorarum Burkenroad,  1939.   FAO Fish.
         Rep. 57(4): 1499-537.

23. Costello, T. J. and D. M. Allen.   1966.  Migrations and geographic distri            -
         bution of pink shrimp, Penaeus duorarum, of the Tortugas and Sanibel
         grounds, Florida.  Fish. Bull. 65(2): 449-459.

24. Coultas, C. L.  1980.  Transplanting needlerush (Juncus roemerianus).  Pp.
         117-121  in  D.  P.  Cole  (ed.),  Proceedings  of  the  Seventh  Annual
         Conferenc6on the Restoration and Creation of Wetlands. Hillsborough
         Community College, Tampa, Florida. 294 pp.

25. Craig,  H.   1953.   The geochemistry of stable carbon isotopes.   Geochim.
         Cosmochim. Acta 3: 53-92.

26. de la Cruz,  A. A.   1973.   The role of tidal marshes in productivity of
         coastal waters.  Assoc. Southeastern Biol. Bull. 20: 147-156.

27. Darovec,  J. E.,  Jr.,  J. M. Carlton,  T. R. Pulver, M. D. Moffler, G. B.
    Smith,  W. K. Whitfield,  Jr.,  S. A. Willis,  K. A.  Steidinger,  and E. A.
    Joyce,  Jr.    1975.    Techniques  for  coastal  restoration  and  fishery
         enhancement in Florida.   Fla. Dept.  Nat. Res. Marine Res. Publ. No.
         15. 27 pp.

                                        200
<pb n="206" />

28. Day, J. W., Jr. and A. Yanez-Arancibia.   1982.  Coastal lagoons and estu-
        aries,  ecosystem approach.   Ciencia Interamericana OAS Wash.,  D.C.
        22: 11-26.

29. Day,  J. W.,  Jr.,  W.  G. Smith,  P. R. Wagner,  and W. C. Stone.   1973.
        Community structure and carbon budget of a salt marsh and shallow bay
        estuary system in Louisiana. Center for Wetland Resources. La. State
        Univ.,Baton  Rouge,  LA.  LSU-SG-72-04.    80  pp.

30. DeNiro, M. J. and S. Epstein. 1978. Influence of diet on the distribution
        of carbon isotopes in animals.  Geochim. Cosmochim. Acta 42: 495-506.
        Department  of  Natural  Resources,  Bureau  of  Environmental  Land
        Management. 1983. Charlotte Harbor aquatic preservesmanagement plan.
        120  pp.

31. Durako, M. J., J. A. Browder, W. L. Kruczynski, C. B. Subrahmanyam and R.
   E. Turner.   1983.   Florida aquatic habitat and fishery resources:   salt
        marshes.   Proc. Fla. Chapt. Am. Fish. Soc. 3rd Ann. Mtg., Feb. 7-9,
         1983,  Brooksville,  FL.    In  review.

32. Durako, M. J. and M. D. Moffler.   1981.  Variation in Thalassia testudinum
        seedling growth related to geographic origin.   Pp. 99-117 in R. H.
        Stovall  (ed.), Proceedings of the Eighth Annual Conference- etlands
        Restoration  and  Creation.    Hillsborough  Community  College,  Tampa,
        Florida.    200  pp.

33. Eleuterius, L. N.   1976.   The distribution of Juncus roemerianus in the
        salt  marshes  of  North  America.    Chesapeake  Sci.  17:  289-292.

34. Estevez, E. D., J. M. Miller, and J. Morris.  1981.  A review of scientific
        information Charlotte Harbor estuarine ecosystem complex and the Peace
        River.  Report to South West Florida Regional Planning Council.  Mote
        Marine Laboratory, Sarasota, Florida.

35. Evans, M., T. Brungardt, and R. Evans.  1978.  Shoreline analysis of Sara-
        sota  County  bay  systems  with  regard  to  revegetation  activities.
        Sponsored by Environmental Studies Program of New College of U.S.F.,
        Sarasota County C.E.T.A. program, and Sarsota Board of County Com-
        missioners.    71  pp.

36. Federal Water Pollution Control Administration, Department of the Interior.
    1969.    Problems  and  management  of water  quality  in  Hillsborough  Bay,
        Florida.    Hillsborough  Bay Technical  Assistance  Project.   88 pp.

37. Fehring, W. K., C. Giovenco, and W. Hoffman.  1979.  An analysis of three
        marsh-creation  projects  in Tampa  Bay resulting  from regulatory re-
        quirements for mitigation.  Pp. 191-206 in D. P. Cole (ed.), Proceed-
        ings of the Sixth Annual Conference on t-e Restoration and Creation
        of Wetlands.  Hillsborough Community College, Tampa, Florida.  357 pp.

38. Finucane, J. H.  1969.  Ecology of the pompano (Trachinotus carolinus) and
        the permit  (T. falcatus)  in Florida.   Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 98(3):
        478-486.

                                       201
<pb n="207" />

39. Florida Department of Natural Resources, Bureau of Marine Science and
   Technology.    1950-1978.   Summary of Florida commercial  marine  landings.
        Tallahassee, Florida.

40. Fonseca,  M.  S.,  W.  J. Kenworthy,  J. Homziaki  and G. W. Thayer.   1979.
        Transplanting of eelgrass and shoalgrass as a potential means of miti-
        gating  a recent  loss of habitat.   Pp. 279-326 in D. P. Cole  (ed.),
         Proceeding of the Sixth Annual Conference on The Restoration and
        Creation of Wetlands. Hillsborough Community College, Tampa, Florida.
         357 pp.

41. Frayer, W. E., T.  J. Monahan,  D. C. Bowden,  and F. A. Graybill.   1982.
         Status and trends of wetlands and deepwater habitats in the conter-
        minous United States, 1950's to 1970's.   Mimei. Tech. Rep.  Fish and
        Wildlife  Service,  U.S.  Department  of  the  Interior.    18  pp.

42. Friedly,  D. L. and F. A. Unger.   1981.   Florida spatial  data inventory,
         1980-81.   Florida Resources and Environmental Analysis Center, Talla-
         hassee,  Florida.    226  pp.

43. Fry,  B., R.  Lutes,  M.  Northam,  P. L.  Parker,  and  J. Ogden.   1982.   A
         13C/12C  comparison  of food  webs  in Caribbean  seagrass  meadows  and
         coral  reefs.    Aquat.  Bot.  14:  389-398.

44. Fry,  B. and P. L. Parker.   1979.   Animal  diet in Texas seagrass meadows;
           13C  evidence  for  the  importance  of  benthic  plants.    Estuarine
         Coastal Mar. Sci. 8: 499-509.

45. Fry,  B., R. S. Scalan,  and P. L. Parker.   1977.   Stable carbon isotope
         evidence for two sources of organic matter in coastal sediments: sea-
         grasses  and  plankton.    Geochim.  Cosmochim.  Acta  41:  1875-1877.

46. Futch, C. R.   1976.   Biology of striped mullet.   Pp. 63-69 in J. C. Cato
         and W. E. McCullough  (eds.), Economics, Biology,  and Food Technology
         of Mullet.   State Univ.  System of Florida Sea Grant Report No.  15.

47. Gilmore, R. G., D. W. Cooke, and C. J. Donohoe.  1982.  A comparison of the
         fish populations and habitat in open and closed salt marsh impound-
         ments  in  East-Central  Florida.    Northeast  Gulf  Sci.  5(2):  25-38.

48. Godcharles, M. F.  1971.  A study of the effects of a commercial hydraulic
         clam dredge on benthic communities  in estuarine  areas.   Fla.  Dept.
         Nat.  Res.  Tech.  Ser.  No.  64.    51  pp.

49. Gosselink,  J. G., E. P. Odum,  and R. M. Pope.   1974.   The value of the
         tidal marsh.   Center for Wetland Resources, Louisiana State Universi-
         ty,  Baton  Rouge,  LA.       LSU-SG-74-03.    30  pp.

50. Grey, W. F. and M. D. Moffler.   1978.  Flowering of the seagrass Thalassia
         testudinum, (Hydrocharitaceae) in the Tampa Bay, Florida area.  Aquat.
         Bot. 5:251-259.

51. Haines,  E.  B.  and  C.  L.  Montague.    1979.    Food  sources  of  estuarine
         invertebrates  analyzed  using  13C/12C  ratios.    Ecology  60:  48-56.

                                        202
<pb n="208" />

52. Hannan, J.  1975.   Aspects of red mangrove reforestation in Florida.  Pp.
        112-121 in R. R. Lewis (ed.)., Proceedings for Second Annual Confer-
        ence on the Restoration  of Coastal  Vegetation  in Florida.   Hills-
        borough  Community  College,  Tampa,  Florida.    203  pp.

53. Hansen, D. J.  1969.  Food, growth, migration, reproduction, and abundance
        of pinfish, Lagodon rhomboides, and Atlantic croaker, Micropogon
        undulatus, near Pensacola, Florida, 1963-65.   U.S. Fish WiTldlT. Serv.
        Fish. Bull. 68(1): 135-146.

54. Harlin, M. M.  1980.   Seagrass epiphytes.   Pp. 117-151 in R. C. Phillips
         and C. P. McRoy (eds.), Handbook of seagrass biology - an ecosystem
        perspective.    Garland  STPM  Press,  New  York.

55. Harrington, R. W., Jr. and E. S. Harrington.   1982.  Effects on fishes and
        their forage organisms of impounding a Florida salt marsh to prevent
        breeding by salt marsh mosquitoes.   Bull. Mar. Sci. 32(2): 523-531.

56. Harrington, R. W., Jr. and E. S. Harrington.   1961.  Food selection among
        fishes invading a high subtropical salt marsh: from onset of flooding
        through  the  progress  of  a mosquito  brood.    Ecology  42:  646-666.

57. Heald, E. J. and W. E. Odum.  1970.  The contribution of mangrove swamps to
        Florida  fisheries.    Proc.  Gulf  Caribb.  Fish.  Inst.  22:  130-135.

58. Heck, K. L. and R. J. Orth. 1980. Seagrass habitats: the roles of habitat
        complexity, competition and predation in structuring associated fish
         and  motile  macroinvertebrate  assemblages.    Pp.  449-464  in  V.  S.
        Kennedy (ed.).   Estuarine Perspectives.   Academic Press,  Inc.,  New
         York.    533  pp.

59. Herwitz, S.  1977.  The natural history of Cayo-Costa Island.  New College
         Environmental  Studies  Program  Pub.  No.  14,  Sarasota,  Florida.

60. Hildebrand, S. F. and L. E. Cable.  1930.  Development and life history of
         fourteen Teleostan fishes at Beaufort, N.C. Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. 46:
         383-488.

61. Hildebrand,  S. F. and W. C. Schroeder.   1927.  Fishes of Chesapeake Bay.
         Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. 43(1): 1-366.

62. Hoffman, W. E., M. J. Durako and R. R. Lewis, III.  1983.  Habitat restora-
        tion  in  Tampa  Bay,  Florida.  (in  press).    Proceedings  Bay  Area
         Scientific Information Symposium (BASIS), May 3-6 1982, Tampa, FL.

63. Hoffman, W. E. and J. A. Rodgers,  Jr.  1980.  A cost/benefit analysis of
         two large coastal  plantings in Tampa Bay, Florida.   Pp. 265-278 in
         D. P. Cole (ed.), Proceedings of the Seventh Annual Conference
         Restoration and Creation of Wetlands.  Hillsborough Community College,
         Tampa,  Florida.    294  pp.

                                       203
<pb n="209" />

64. Hunt, L. J.  1979.   Principles of marsh establishment.   Pp. 127-142 in D.
         P. Cole (ed.), Proceedings of the Sixth Annual Conference on the
         Restoration and Creation of Wetlands.  Hillsborough Community College,
        Tampa,  Florida.    357  pp.

65.  Joseph, E. G.  1973.  Analyses of a nursery ground.  PD. 118-121 in A. L.
         Pacheco (ed.).  Proceedings of a Workshop on Egg, Larval, and Juvenile
         Stages of Fish in Atlantic Coast Estuaries.   Tech. Publ. No. 1, Mid-
         Atlantic Coastal Fish Center, Highlands, N. J.

66. Junkin, B., R. Pearson, B. Seyforth, M. Kalcic, M. Graham.   1981.   ELAS
         Earth  Resources  Laboratory  Applications  Software.    NASA/NSTL  Earth
         Resources  Laboratory  Rep.  No.  183.    NSTL  Station,  Mississippi.

67. Kelly, J. A., Jr., C. M. Fuss, Jr., and J. R. Hall.  1971.  The transplant-
         ing and survival of turtle grass, Thalassia testudinum, in Boca Ciega
         Bay,  Florida.    Fish.  Bull.  69(2):  2/3-280.

68. Kikuchi, T. and J. M. Peres.   1977.   Consumer ecology of seagrass beds.
         Pp.  147-193 in C. P. McRoy and C. Helfferich  (eds.), Seagrass Eco-
         systems.    MaFcel  Dekker,  Inc.,  New  York.

69. Kilby, J. D.  1955.  The fishes of two Gulf coastal marsh areas of Florida.
         Tul. Stud. Zoo. 2(8): 175-247.

70. Kjelson, M. A., D. S. Peters, G. W. Thayer, and G. N. Johnson.  1975.  The
         general feeding ecology of postlarval fishes in the Newport River
         estuary.    U.S.  Fish.  Wildl.  Serv.  Fish.  Bull.  73(1):  137-144.

71. Knight, D. B., P. L. Knutson, and E. J. Pullen.  1980.  An annotated bibli            -
         ography of seagrasses with emphasis on planting and propagation tech-
         niques.   U.S.  Army Corps  of Eng.   CERC Misc.  Rep.  80-7.   46 pp.

72. Kruczynski, W. L., C. B. Subrahmanyam, and S. H. Drake.  1978.  Studies on
         the plant community of a North Florida salt marsh, part 1, primary
         production.    Bull.  Mar.  Sci.  28:  316-334.

73. Kutkuhn,  J. H.   1966.   The role of estuaries in the development and per-
         petuation of commercial  shrimp resources.   Pp. 16-36 in R. F. Smith,
         A.  H. Swartz,  and W.  H. Massmann  (eds.), A Symposium on Estuarine
         Fishes.    Am.  Fish.  Soc.  Spec.  Publ.  3.    154  pp.

74. Kuyper, W. H., J. E. Becker, and A. Shopmyer.   1981.  Land use, cover and
         forms  classification  system.    A technical  manual.    Department  of
         Transportation,  State  Topographic  Office,  Remote  Sensing  Center.
         67  pp.

75. Lankford,  R.  R.   1977.   Coastal  lagoons  of Mexico:   their  origin  and
         classification.      Pp.  182-215  in  M.  L.  Wiley  (ed.),  Estuarine
         Processes.    Academic  Press,  Inc.  New  York.    533  pp.

76. Lauff, G. H. (ed.).   1967.   Estuaries.   Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci. Spec. Publ.
         83:  1-785.

                                        204
<pb n="210" />

77. Lewis, R. R., III.  1981.   Economics and feasibility of mangrove restora-
        tion.   Pp. 88-93 in R. C. Carey, P. S. Markovits, and J. B. Kirkwood
         (eds.), Proceedings U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Workshop on Coastal
        Ecosystems of the Southeastern United States. U.S. Fish and Wildlife
        Service,  FWS/OBS-80/59.    257  pp.

78. Lewis, R. R. and F. M. Dunstan.   1975.   The possible role of Spartina
         alterniflora Loisel in establishment of mangroves in Florida.  Pp. 82-
         100 in R. R. Lewis (ed.), Proceedings for Second Annual Conference on
        the -Restoration  of  Coastal  Vegetation  in  Florida.    Hillsborough
         Community  College,  Tampa,  Florida.    203  pp.

79. Lewis, R. R., III and F. M. Dunstan.   1974.  Use of spoil islands in re-
        establishing mangrove communities  in Tampa Bay, Florida,  USA.   Pp.
         766-775 in G. Walsh, S. Snedaker, and H. Teas (eds.), Proceedings of
         International  Symposium  on  Biology  and  Management  of  Mangroves.
         Honolulu,  Hawaii,  October  8-11,  1974.

80. Lewis, R. R., III, and R. C. Phillips.  1980.  Experimental seagrass miti-
         gation in the Florida Keys. Pp. 155-172 in D. P. Cole (ed.), Proceed-
         ings of the Seventh Annual Conference on the Restoration and Creation
         of Wetlands. Hillsborough Community College, Tampa, Florida. 294 pp.

81. Lindall, W. N., Jr.,  1973.  Alterations of estuaries of South Florida: a
         threat to its fish resources.  Mar. Fish. Rev. 35(10): 26-33.

82. Lindall, W. N., Jr., and C. H. Saloman.  1977.  Alteration and destruction
         of estuaries affecting fishery resources of the Gulf of Mexico.  Mar.
         Fish. Rev. 39(9): 1-7.

83. Lorio, W. J. and W. S. Perret.  1980.  Biology and ecology of the spotted
         seatrout  (Cynoscion nebulosus Cuvier).   Pp. 7-14 in R. O. Williams,
         J. E. Weaver, and F. A. Kalber (eds.) Proceedings of the Colloquium on
         the Biology and Management of Red Drum and Spotted Seatrout, Oct. 19-
         20,  1978.    Gulf  States  Marine  Fisheries  Commission.    117  pp.

84. Lugo, A. E. and S. C. Snedaker.   1974.  The ecology of mangroves.   Annu.
         Rev. Ecol. Syst. 5: 39-64.

85. Macalaster, E.   1982.   Probable causes for decline of submerged aquatic
         vegetation disclosed in EPA's Chesapeake Bay Program Report.   Tide-
         water Fisheries News 15(6):1.

86. Mann,  K. H.   1972.   Macrophyte production  and detritus  food chains  in
         coastal waters.   Mem.  1st Ital. Hydrobiol.,  Suppl. 29: 383.   Proc.
         IBP-UNESCO Symp.  Detritus  and its  Ecological  Role  in Aquatic Eco-
         systems.

87. Margalef, R.  1968.  Perspectives in ecological theory.  Univ. of Chicago
         Press,  Chicago,  IL.    111  pp.

88. Margalef, R.  1963.  On certain unifying principles in ecology.  Am. Nat.
         97:  357-374.

                                        205
<pb n="211" />

89. McHugh,  J. L.  1976.   Estuarine fisheries:  are they doomed?  Pp. 15-27 in
         M. Wiley (ed.), Estuarine Processes, Volume I.  Academic Press, New
         York. 533 pp.

90. McLane, W. M.   1955.   Fishes of the St. Johns River system.   MS Thesis,
         Univ.  Fla.  370  pp.

91. McMillan, C.  1979.   Differentiation in response to chilling temperatures
         among populations of three marine spermatophytes, Thalassia testudi-
         num, Syringodium filiforme, and Halodule wrightii.  Amer. J. B-ot.T66:
         810-819.

92. McMillan, C.  1978.  Morphogeographic variation under controlled conditions
         in five seagrasses. Thalassia testudinum, Halodule wrightii, Syringo-
         dinium filiforme,  Halophila engelmanii,  and  Zostera marina.   Aquat.
         Bot.  4:169-189.

93. McMillan,  C. and R. C. Phillips.   1979.   Differentiation in habitat re-
         sponse among populations of new world seagrasses.  Aquat. Bot. 7:185-
         196.

94. McNulty,  J. K., W. N. Lindall, Jr., and J. E. Sykes.   1972.   Cooperative
         Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory and study, Florida. phase 1: area
         description.    NOAA  Tech.  Rep.  NMFS  Circ.  368.    126  pp.

95. Miller,  J. M. and M. L. Dunn.   1980.   Feeding strategies and patterns of
         movement in juvenile estuarine fishes.   Pp. 437-448 in V. S. Kennedy
          (ed.), Estuarine Perspectives.   Academic Press,  Inc., New York.   533
         PP.

96. Minson, D. J., M. M. Ludlow, and J. H. Troughton.   1975.  Differences in
         natural  carbon isotope ratios of milk and hair from cattle grazing
         tropical  and  temperate  pastures.    Nature  245:  602.

97. Moody, W. D.  1950.  A study of the natural history of the spotted trout,
         Cynoscion nebulosus, in the Cedar Key, Florida area. Q. J. Fla. Acad.
         Sci.  12(3):  147-171.

98. Nakamura, E. L., J. R. Taylor, and I. K. Workman.  1980.  The occurrence of
          life stages of some recreational marine fishes in estuaries of the
         Gulf  of  Mexico.    NOAA  Tech.  Memo  NMFS-SEFC-45:  53  pp.

99. National  Park Service.   1982.   Wild and scenic river study.   Loxahatchee
         Draft Environmental  Impact Statement.   U.S. Dept. Interior, National
         Park  Service,  Atlanta,  GA.

100. Nier, A. 0. and E. A. Gulbransen. 1939. Variations in the relative abund-
          ance  of  the  carbon  isotopes.    J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  61:  697-698.

101. Odum, E. P.  1980.  The status of three ecosystem-level hypotheses reqard-
         ing salt marsh estuaries:   tidal  subsidy,  outwelling,  and detritus
         based food  chains.   Pp.  485-495  in V. S. Kennedy (ed.), Estuarine
         Perspectives.    Academic  Press,  New  York.    533  pp.

                                        206
<pb n="212" />

102. Odum, E. P.  1971.   Fundamentals of ecology.   W. B. Saunders Co., Phila-
         delphia.     574  pp.

103. Odum, H. T. and B. J. Copeland.   1969.  A functional classification of the
         coastal ecological  systems.   Pp. 9-86 in H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland,
          and E. A. McMahan (eds.), Coastal EcoTgical Systems of the United
          States.   Rep.  Fed.  Water  Pollut.  Contr.  Admin.,  Washington,  D.  C.

104. Odum, W. E.   1971.   Pathways of energy flow in a south Florida estuary.
         Miami  Sea  Grant  Tech.  Bull.  No.  7.    162  pp.

105. Odum,  W.  E.   1970.   Insidious  alteration of the estuarine  environment.
         Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 99: 836-847.

106. Odum,  W.  E.  and  E.  J. Heald.   1972.   Trophic  analysis  of an estuarine
         mangrove  community.    Bull.  Mar.  Sci.  22(3):  671-738.

107. Odum, W. E., C. C. McIvor, and T. J. Smith, III.  1982.  The ecology of the
         mangroves of south Florida: a community profile.   U.S. Fish and Wild-
          life Service, Office of Biological Services, Washington, D. C. FWS/
          OBS-81/24.    144  pp.

108. Odum, W. E. and T.  J. Smith.   1981.   Habitat value of coastal wetlands.
          Pp. 30-35 in R. C. Carey, P. S. Markovits, and J. B. Kirkwood (eds.),
          Proceedings-U.S.  Fish  and Wildlife Service Workshop on Coastal  Eco-
          systems of the Southeastern  United States.   U.S.  Fish  and Wildlife
          Service, Office of Biological Services, Washington, D. C. FWS/OBS-
          80/59.    257  pp.

109. Oesterling, M. J.  1976.  Reproduction, growth and miqration of blue crabs
          along Florida's  Gulf coast.   State  Univ.  Syst.  Florida  Sea Grant.
          Rept.  SUSF-SG-76-003.    19  pp.

110. Orth, R. J.  1977.  The importance of sediment stability in seagrass commu-
          nities.  Pp. 281-300 in B. C. Coull  (ed.), Ecology of Marine Benthos.
          Univ. of South Caro6Tna Press, Columbia.

111. Packard,  J. M.    1981.   Abundance,  distribution,  and feeding  habits  of
          manatees, (Trichechus manatus) wintering between St. Lucie and Palmin
          Beach Inlets, Florida.  Report prepared for the U.S. Fish and Wildlife
          Service,     142  pp.

112. Park, W. M. and S. S. Batie.   1979.  Methodological issues associated with
          estimating the economic value of coastal wetlands in improving water
          quality.   International Estuarine Research Conference, Jekyll  Island,
          Georgia, Oct. 7-12.

113. Perret,  W.  S.,  J.  E.  Weaver,  R.  O.  Williams,  P.  L.  Johansen,  T.  D.
     McIlwain, R. C. Raulerson, and W. M. Tatum.  1980.  Fishery profiles of red
          drum and spotted seatrout.   Gulf States Marine Fisheries Commission,
          Ocean  Springs,  Mississippi.    60  pp.

                                         207
<pb n="213" />

114. Peterson,  C.  H.   1981.   The ecological  role of mud flats  in estuarine
          systems.  Pp. 184-192 in R. C. Carey, P. S. Markovits, and J. B. Kirk-
         wood  (eds.),  Proceeding-s U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Workshop on
         Coastal Ecosystems of the southeastern United States.   U.S. Fish and
         Wildlife Service, Office of Biological Services, Washington, D.C. FWS/
         OBS-80/59.    257  pp.

115. Phillips,  R.  C.   1980.   Planting guidelines  for seagrasses.   U.S.  Army
          Corps  of  Engineers  CERC  Coastal  Eng.  Tech.  Aid  80-2.    28  pp.

116. Phillips, R. C.  1974.  Transplantation of seagrasses with special emphasis
          on  Zostera  marina.    L.  Aquaculture  4(3):  161-176.

117. Phillips, R. C. 1960. Observations on the ecology and distribution of the
         Florida seagrasses.   Fla. St. Bd. Conser. Mar. Lab., Prof. Pap. Ser.
          No. 2. 72 pp.

118. Pomeroy,  L. R.   1959.   Algal  productivity  in salt marshes  of Georgia.
          Limnol. Oceanogr. 4: 386-397.

119. Pritchard, 0. W.  1967.  What is an estuary: physical viewpoint.  In G. H.
          Lauff  (ed.),  Estuaries.   Am.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.  Spec.  Publ. 83:3-5.

120. Pulver,  T. R.   1976.   Transplant  techniques  for sapling mangrove trees,
          Rhizophora mangle, Laguncularia racemosa, and Avicennia germinans, in
          Florida.   -FTla. Mar.  Res.  Publ.  No.  22.    14 pp.

121. Pulver, T. R.   1975.   Suggested mangrove transplanting techniques.   Pp.
          122-131  in  R.  R.  Lewis  (ed.),  Proceedings  of  the  Second  Annual
          Conference on  Restoration  of Coastal  Vegetation in Florida.   Hills-
          borough  Community  College,  Tampa,  Florida.    203  pp.

122. Reid, G. K., Jr.   1954.  An ecological study of the Gulf of Mexico fishes
          in the vicinity of Cedar Key, Florida.   Bull. Mar. Sci. Gulf Caribb.
          4(1):  1-94.

123. Robas, A. K. 1970. South Florida's mangrove-boarded estuaries: their role
          in sport and commercial fish production. Univ. Miami Sea Grant Infor-
          mation  Bull.  No.  4.    28  pp.

124. Robins, C. R., R. M. Bailey, C. E. Bond, J. R. Brooker, E. A. Lachner, R.
     N. Lea, and W. B. Scott.   1980.  A list of common and scientific names of
          fishes from the United States and Canada.   (4th Edition).  Am. Fish.
          Soc.  Spec.  Publ.  No.  12.    114  pp.

125. Roessler, M. A. and J. C. Zieman.   1969.  The effects of thermal additions
          on the biota in southern Biscayne Bay, Florida.   Gulf Caribb. Fish.
          Inst.  Proc.  22nd.        135-145.

126. Sacket, W. M. (in press).   Stable carbon isotope studies on organic matter
          in the marine environment. In P. Fritz and J. C. Fontes (eds.), Hand-
          book  of Environmental  Geochemistry,  Vol.  III.   Elsevier  Publishing
          Co.,  New  York.

                                         208
<pb n="214" />

127. Saltwater Fisheries Study and Advisory Council.   1981.   Progress report.
         August  1980-January  1981.    38  pp.

128. Saurs,  S.  C.    1981.    Seasonal  growth  of  seagrasses  in  Sarasota  Bay,
         Florida,  with  notes  on  historical  changes  and  considerations  for
          restoration.   Pp. 118-139 in R. H. Stovall  (ed.), Proceedings of the
          Eighth Annual Conference onr-Wetlands Restoration and Creation. Hills-
          borough  Community  College,  Tampa,  Florida.    200  pp.

129. Savage,  T.   1972.   Florida mangroves  as shoreline stabilizers.   Florida
          Dept.  Nat.  Resour.  Prof.  Pap.  Ser.  19.    46  pp.

130. Sheridan,  P. F.   1979.   Trophic resource utilization by three species of
          Sciaenid fishes in a northwest Florida estuary.   Northwest Gulf Sci.
          3(1):  1-15.

131. Smith, B. N. and S. Epstein.   1971.  Two categories of 13C/12C ratios in
          dissolved and particulate organic matter in the sea.   Deep Sea Res.
          17: 19-27.

132. Springer,  V. G. and K. D. Woodburn.   1960.   An ecological  study of the
          fishes of the Tampa Bay area.   Fl. State Board Cons. Prof. Pap. Ser.
          No.  1. 104  pp.

133. Stickney,  R. R.,  G.  L. Taylor,  and  D.  B. White.   Food  habits  of five
          species  of young  southeastern  United  States  estuarine  Sciaenidae.
          Chesapeake Sci. 16(2): 104-114.

134. Subrahmanyam, C. B., W. L. Kruczynski, and S. H. Drake.  1976.  Studies on
          the animal  communities  in two North Florida salt marshes.   Part II.
          Macroinvertebrate  communities.    Bull.  Mar.  Sci.  26:  172-195.

135. Summerson,  H. C.   1980.   The effects of predation on the marine henthic
          community in and around a shallow subtidal seagrass bed.  M.S. Thesis,
          Univ.  North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill.    118  pp.

136. Sykes, J. E. and J. H. Finucane.   1966.  Occurrence in Tampa Bay, Florida,
          of immature species dominant in Gulf of Mexico commercial  fisheries.
          Fish.  Bull.  65(2):  369-379.

137. Tabb, D. C.  1961.  A contribution to the biology of the spotted seatrout,
          Cynoscion nebulosus  (Cuvier) of east-central  Florida.   Board of Con-
          servation:  Technical  Series  No.  35.    24  pp.

138. Tabb, D. C. and R. B. Manning.   1961.  A checklist of the flora and fauna
          of northern Florida Bay and adjacent brackish waters of the Florida
          mainland  collected  during  the  period  July,  1957 through  September,
          1960.    Bull.  Mar.  Sci.  Gulf  Caribb.  11(4):  552-649.

139. Taylor,  J. L.   1974.   The Charlotte Harbor estuarine  system.   Fla.  Sci.
          37(4): 205-216.

                                         209
<pb n="215" />

140. Taylor, J. L., J. R. Hall, and C. H. Saloman.   1970. Mollusks and benthic
         environments  in Hillsborough  Bay,  Florida.   U.S. Fish Wildl.  Serv.
         Fish. Bull. 68(2): 191-202.

141. Taylor, J. L. and C. H. Saloman.  1968.  Some effects of hydraulic dredging
          and coastal development in Boca Ciega Bay, Florida.   U.S. Fish Wild-
          life  Serv.    Fish.  Bull.  67(2):  213-241.

142. Teas, H. J.  1981.   Restoration of mangrove ecosystems.  Pp. 95-103 in R.
          C. Carey, P. S. Markovits and J. B. Kirkwood (eds.), Proceedings U.S.
          Fish and Wildlife Service Workshop on Coastal Ecosystems of the South-
          eastern United States. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Office of Bio-
          logical  Services,  Washington,  D.C.  FWS/OBS-80/59.    257  pp.

143. Teas, H. J.  1980.  Mangrove swamp creation.  Pp. 63-90 in J. C. Lewis and
          E. W. Bunce (eds.), Rehabilitation and Creation of -Selected Coastal
          Habitats: Proceedings of a Workshop.   U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service,
          Office  of  Biological  Services.    FWS/OBS-80/27.    162  pp.

144. Teas,  H.  J.   1977.   Ecology  and restoration  of mangrove  shorelines  in
          Florida.    Environ.  Conserv.  4:  51-58.

145. Teas, H. J., W. Jurgens, and M. C. Kimball.   1975.  Plantings of red man-
          grove  (Rhizophora  mangle  L.)  in Charlotte  and St.  Lucie Counties,
          Florida.   Pp. 132-161 in R. R. Lewis (ed.), Proceedings of the Second
          Annual Conference on 1estoration of Coastal Vegetation in Florida.
          Hillsborough Community College, Tampa, Florida.

146. Thayer, G. W. and J. F. Ustach.   1981.   Gulf of Mexico wetlands: value,
          state of knowledge and research  needs.   Proc.  Gulf Coast Workshop.
          NOAA/Office of Marine Pollution Assessment, Miami, Fla. Oct. 1979.

147. Thorhaug, A.   1980.   Techniques for creating seagrass meadows in damaged
          areas along the east coast of the U.S.A.  Pp. 105-116 in J. C. Lewis
          and  E.  W.  Bunce  (eds.),  Rehabilitation  and  Creation of  Selected
          Coastal Habitats: Proceedings of a Workshop.   U.S. Fish and Wildlife
          Service,  Office  of  Biological  Services.    FWS/OBS-80/27.    162  pp.

148. Thorhaug, A.  1974.   Transplantation of the seagrass Thalassia testudinum
          Konig.    Aquaculture  4:177-183.

149. Turner, R. E., S. W. Woo, and H. R. Jitts.  1979.  Estuarine influences on
          a  continental  shelf  plankton  community.    Science  206:  218-220.

150. Turner,  R.  E.   1977.    Intertidal  vegetation  and commerecial  yields  of
          penaeid  shrimp.    Trans.  Am.  Fish.  Soc.  106:411-416.

151. Turner, R. E.  1976.   Geographic variations in salt marsh macrophyte pro-
          duction:  a  review.    Contrib.  Mar.  Sci.  20:  48-68.

152. U.S.  Department  of  the  Interior,  Bureau  of  Land  Management.    1978.

153. Upchurch,  S.  B.,  E.  D.  Esteves,  and R.  Rea.   1976.   Distribution  and
          possible effects of removal and sedimentary contamination offshore of
          Gardinier, Inc. in Tampa Bay, Florida. Univ. Fla., Tampa, Fla. llOpp.

                                         210
<pb n="216" />

154. vanBreedveld,  J.  1976.   Transplanting of seagrasses with emphasis on the
         importance of substrate.   Fla. Mar. Res. Publ. No. 126, St. Peters-
         burg,  Florida.    25  pp.

155. vanBreedveld,  J. F.  1975.   The transplanting of seagrasses with emphasis
         on the importance of the substrate.   Fla. Dept. Nat. Res. Mar. Res.
         Publ.  No.  17.    26  pp.

156. Welsh, W. W. and C. M. Breder, Jr.  1923.  Contributions to the life his-
         tories of Sciaenidae of the eastern United States coast.  Bull. U.S.
         Bur.  Fish.  39:  141-201.

157. Weinstein, M. P. and H. A. Brooks.   1983.   Comparative ecology of nekton
         residing  in a tidal  creek and adjacent seagrass meadows:  community
         composition  and  structure.    Mar.  Ecol.  Prog.  Ser.  12:15-27.

158. Whittaker, R. H.  1975.  Communities and Ecosystems. 2nd Edition.  McMillan
          Publishing  Co.,  Inc.,  New  Yor-k-.

159. Wong, W. W. and W. M. Sacket,  1978.  Fractionation of stable carbon iso-
         topes by marine phytoplankton.   Geochim. Cosmochim. Acta. 42: 1809-
          1815.

160. Woodhouse, W. W., Jr., E. D. Seneca, and S. W. Broome.  1972.  Marsh build-
          ing with dredge spoil in North Carolina. N.C. Agric. Expt. Stn. Bull.
          445.    28  pp.

161. Yokel, B. J.  1975.   Rookery Bay land use studies: environmental planning
          strategies for the development of a mangrove shoreline, No. 5.  Estu-
          arine  Biology.    Conservation  Foundation,  Washington,  D.  C.

162. Zieman, J. C.  1982.  The ecology of seagrasses of south Florida:  a com-
          munity profile.   U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Office of Biological
          Services,  Washington,  D.C.  FWS/OBS-82/25.    158  pp.

163. Zieman, J. C.  1981  The food within seagrass beds and their relationship
          to adjacent systems. Pp. 115-121 in R. C. Carey, P. S. Markovits, and
          J.  B.  Kirkwood  (eds.),  Proceedings  U.S.  Fish  and Wildlife Service
          Workshop on Coastal Ecosystems of the Southeastern United States.  U.
          S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Office of Biological Services, Washing-
          ton,  D.C.  FWS/OBS-80/59.    257  pp.

164. Zieman, J. C.  1976.  The ecological effects of physical damage from motor-
          boats on turtle grass beds in southern Florida.   Aquat. Bot. 2: 127-
          139.

165. Zieman, J. C.  1974.  Methods for the study of the growth and production of
          turtlegrass,  Thalassia  testudinum  Konig.    Aquaculture  4:139-142.

166. Zimmerman, R. J., T. J. Minello, and G. Zamora, Jr.  (1984).  Selection of
          vegetated habitat by brown shrimp, Penaeus aztecus, in a Galveston Bay
          salt marsh. Fish. Bull. 82(2):(in press).

                                         211
<pb n="217" />

"We never know the worth of the water
     'till the well is dry,"

                      -Thomas Fuller  1608-1666
</text>
</doc>
